SURPASS Hit 7070 3.2 Documentation

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for
the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under
which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or
transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens
Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly
trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens
Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and
improvement of the documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS
DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL,
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS
OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR
THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective
owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2011. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
This document consists of a total of 838 pages. All pages are issue 1.
1.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................... 1

2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 13
2.1 Using this Help System .................................................................... 13
2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features .......................................................... 14
2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software................................................ 15
3 General 17
3.1 Date / Time Configuration................................................................. 17
3.2 Network Element Configuration........................................................ 18
3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack .................................................. 20
3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack.................................................... 24
3.5 Option Settings ................................................................................. 28
3.6 EOW Configurations ......................................................................... 30
3.7 Neighbour Ports................................................................................ 31
3.8 Script Configuration .......................................................................... 32
4 Extension Shelf 37
4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration .......................................................... 37
4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration ....................................................... 38
5 Subrack Equipping 39
5.1 Possible Equipping Information ........................................................ 39
5.2 Actual Equipping Information............................................................ 40
5.3 Card Inventory Summary.................................................................. 41
5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config ....................................................... 42
6 Card Label Information 43
6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information ........................ 43
6.2 PDH Cards Label Information........................................................... 44
6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information ................................................. 45
6.4 CLU Card Label info ......................................................................... 46
6.5 SCOH Card Label Information.......................................................... 47
6.6 IF2M Card Label Information............................................................ 48
6.7 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information................................................. 49
6.8 Booster Cards Label Information...................................................... 50
7 Card Configuration 51
7.1 Card Equipment Configuration ......................................................... 51
7.2 SCOH Card Configuration ................................................................ 52
7.3 CLU Card Configuration ................................................................... 53
7.4 SF160G Card Configuration ............................................................. 55
7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration .............................................. 56
7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack ..................... 58
7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration ................................................... 59
7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards ................................................... 61
7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ....................................................... 62
7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards ................................................... 63
7.11 Card Configuration for IF4FE4GEB.................................................. 65
7.12 Card Configuration for IF4FE4GEB Ethernet ................................... 67
7.13 IFSO* Cards Configuration............................................................... 69
7.14 Port Provisioning Configuration ........................................................ 70
7.15 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config........................................................ 71
7.16 IF4FE4GEB Port Provisioning Configuration ................................... 73
7.17 IFO155 Port Provisioning Configuration........................................... 74
7.18 TP_Reservation ................................................................................ 75
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 i
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
8 Timing 77
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration.................................. 77
8.2 T0 Configuration ............................................................................... 80
8.3 T1 Configuration ............................................................................... 81
8.4 T3 Configuration ............................................................................... 83
8.5 T4 Configuration ............................................................................... 85
9 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows 87
9.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 87
9.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................... 88
9.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 89
9.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 90
9.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 91
9.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 92
9.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 93
9.8 ETH Traffic Flow ............................................................................... 94
9.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ...................................................................... 95
9.10 VC4 Configuration ............................................................................ 96
9.11 VC4 Selection ................................................................................... 99
9.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow.................................................... 100
10 Alarms 101
10.1 Alarm List........................................................................................ 101
10.2 NEAP Configuration ....................................................................... 104
10.3 Equipment Alarms .......................................................................... 105
10.4 Communication Alarms .................................................................. 107
10.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table............................................. 109
10.6 E3/VC3 Alarms ............................................................................... 114
10.7 1:N MSP Alarms ............................................................................. 116
10.8 TIF Configuration ............................................................................ 118
10.9 TCA List .......................................................................................... 119
11 Protection Traffic Flow 121
11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow ..................................................... 121
11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow ................................................. 122
11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow................................................. 123
11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow................................................. 124
11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 125
11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 126
11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 127
11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 128
11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .......................................................... 129
11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ...................................................... 130
11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 131
11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 132
11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 133
11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 134
11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 135
11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 136
11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 137
11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 138
11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow............................................................. 139
12 Protection Selection Windows 141
12.1 VC4 Selection with ETH Cards....................................................... 141
13 Traffic Configuration 143
13.1 Port Configuration........................................................................... 143
13.2 IF4FE4GEB Port Configuration (Electrical and Optical)................. 145
13.3 Port Configuration for IFQ2G5........................................................ 147
ii A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.4 IFQGBEB Port configuration .......................................................... 149

13.5 STM-N Configuration...................................................................... 150
13.6 AU4/VC4 Configuration .................................................................. 154
13.7 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ........................................................ 156
13.8 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP ........................................................ 158
13.9 ETH Configuration .......................................................................... 161
13.10 E12 Configuration....................................................................... 164
13.11 E3 Configuration......................................................................... 166
13.12 IFSOA – Config .......................................................................... 167
14 Multiplex Structure 169
14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure.................................................................. 169
15 Cross Connections 171
15.1 Cross Connections List................................................................... 171
15.2 Plain Cross Connections List.......................................................... 173
15.3 Add Cross Connection.................................................................... 175
15.4 Cross Connection Details ............................................................... 177
15.5 Cross Connections Graphic............................................................ 178
15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details ................................................. 180
15.7 Modify Cross Connection ............................................................... 181
15.8 Overhead Cross Connections ........................................................ 182
16 Protection Management 185
16.1 Protection Management ................................................................. 185
17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection 187
17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration...................................................... 187
18 1 to 1 MSP Protection 189
18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration ................................................................... 189
19 1 to N MSP Protection 191
19.1 1:N MSP Configuration................................................................... 191
19.2 Add 1:N MSP .................................................................................. 194
19.3 1:N MSP Extension ........................................................................ 195
19.4 Add Working Ports.......................................................................... 196
19.5 Working STM-1 Selection............................................................... 197
19.6 Working VC4 Selection................................................................... 198
20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection 199
20.1 2F SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 199
20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration..................................................... 202
20.3 4F SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 205
20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration ....................................... 208
20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration......................................... 210
20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING...................... 211
20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING...................................... 212
20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ............................ 213
20.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING...................................... 214
20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING ................. 215
20.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING ................................. 216
20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra........................ 217
20.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING ................................. 218
20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config ................................. 219
20.15 4F-Spring X Config..................................................................... 220
21 Link Protection 223
21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow ........................................... 223
21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration ........................................ 224
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 iii
21.3 Add Extension Link Protection........................................................ 225

21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration...................................................................... 227
21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration............................................................. 228
22 Concatenations 229
22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection..................................................... 229
22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection................................................................. 230
22.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection............................................................... 233
22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection....................................................... 234
22.7 VC12-2v Configuration ................................................................... 235
22.8 Concatenation Configuration .......................................................... 236
22.9 Concatenation Details .................................................................... 239
22.10 Add Concatenation Group.......................................................... 240
22.11 Concatenation Group Templates ............................................... 241
22.12 Modify Template......................................................................... 242
22.13 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration........................................... 243
23 VLAN 245
23.1 VLAN Functionality ......................................................................... 245
23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow ....................................................................... 248
23.3 VLAN Selection .............................................................................. 250
23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment .................................................... 251
23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment........................................................ 254
23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information ..................................................... 257
23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment .............................................................. 258
24 Virtual VCs 259
24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection......................................................... 259
24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration ............................................................. 260
24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration ............................................................... 263
24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration ....................................................... 266
25 GFP Configurations 269
25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow.................................................................. 269
25.2 GFP Group Subview....................................................................... 270
25.3 GFP Assignment ............................................................................ 271
25.4 SDH GFP Assignment.................................................................... 274
26 LCAS 277
26.1 LCAS State Configuration .............................................................. 277
26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group ............................................... 279
26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration........................................................... 280
26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration......................................................... 281
26.5 LCAS VC4-2v Config...................................................................... 282
26.6 LCAS VC4 Details Concatenation Group....................................... 283
26.7 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection .............................................. 284
26.8 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .......................................... 285
26.9 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration .................................................... 286
26.10 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration .............................................. 289
27 MCF General 293
27.1 Message Communication Functions .............................................. 293
27.2 IP over IP Config ............................................................................ 294
27.3 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration............................................ 296
27.4 MCF Transport Connection Information ......................................... 298
27.5 MCF Transport Connection Performance ...................................... 300
iv A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
28 MCF CLNS 301

28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information...................................... 301
28.2 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................ 303
29 MCF DCC 307
29.1 MCF DCC Configuration................................................................. 307
29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ................................................... 309
29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance.................................................... 311
29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................ 313
29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ............................................ 315
29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections .................. 316
30 MCF Ethernet 317
30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration ............................................. 317
30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance.............................................. 319
30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address .......................................... 321
30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ...................................... 323
31 MCF OSI/IP 325
31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration...................................................... 325
31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration...................................................... 326
31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance....................................................... 328
31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address ........................... 330
31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address ....................... 332
32 IP Settings 333
32.1 IP Addresses Configuration............................................................ 333
32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify ............................................................. 336
32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration ...................................................... 337
32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................ 339
32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify........................................................ 340
33 OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) 341
33.1 OSPF Configuration ....................................................................... 341
33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration ............................................................. 346
33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify .............................................................. 348
33.4 OSPF Areas Entry Add................................................................... 351
33.5 OSPF Area Metric Configuration .................................................... 352
33.6 OSPF Area Metric Entry Add.......................................................... 353
33.7 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration ........................................... 354
33.8 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add ................................................. 356
33.9 OSPF Interfaces Configuration....................................................... 358
33.10 OSPF Interface Entry Modify ..................................................... 360
33.11 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add........................................................ 364
33.12 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ......................................... 367
33.13 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration ....................................... 368
33.14 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Modify ........................................ 371
33.15 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add............................................. 373
33.16 OSPF Neighbours Information ................................................... 375
33.17 OSPF Neighbours Entry Details................................................. 377
33.18 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information........................................ 379
33.19 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details ..................................... 381
33.20 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................ 383
33.21 OSPF LSDB Entry Details.......................................................... 385
33.22 OSPF External LSDB Information.............................................. 387
33.23 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ........................................... 389
33.24 Switching Info ............................................................................. 390
33.25 Switching Entry Details .............................................................. 392
33.26 Performance............................................................................... 394
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 v
34 OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) 395

34.1 OSPF Configuration ....................................................................... 395
34.2 OSPF Areas Configuration ............................................................. 397
34.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify .............................................................. 399
34.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration .................................................... 400
34.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration ........................................... 401
34.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add ................................................. 403
34.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration....................................................... 404
34.8 OSPF Entry Add ............................................................................. 406
34.9 OSPF Interface metric Configuration ............................................. 408
34.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration ....................................... 409
34.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add............................................. 411
34.12 OSPF Neighbours Information ................................................... 412
34.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information........................................ 414
34.14 OSPF Virtual neighbours Entry Details ...................................... 416
34.15 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................ 417
34.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details.......................................................... 419
34.17 OSPF External LSDB Information.............................................. 420
34.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ........................................... 422
35 TCP Settings 423
35.1 TCP Connections Information ........................................................ 423
35.2 TCP Connections Entry Details ...................................................... 425
36 Data 427
36.1 Subrack Data .................................................................................. 427
36.2 ASIC Data Information.................................................................... 428
36.3 Copy Data....................................................................................... 429
36.4 Copy Card Data .............................................................................. 431
36.5 DB Management Configuration ...................................................... 432
36.6 DB Download Dialog ...................................................................... 434
36.7 DB Upload Dialog ........................................................................... 435
36.8 NE Logs Information....................................................................... 436
36.9 Log Records Attribute..................................................................... 437
37 Performance 439
37.1 Ethernet Packet Performance ........................................................ 439
37.2 AU4 PJE Performance ................................................................... 442
37.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance ......................................................... 444
37.4 MSTTP Near End Performance...................................................... 447
37.5 MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 451
37.6 RSTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 455
37.7 VCCTP Near End Performance...................................................... 459
37.8 VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 463
37.9 VCTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 467
37.10 VCTTP Far End Performance .................................................... 471
37.11 VC12 Near End Performance .................................................... 475
37.12 VC12 Far End Performance....................................................... 479
37.13 GFP Frames Performance ......................................................... 483
38 GMPLS 485
38.1 GMPLS Config................................................................................ 485
38.2 Interface Configuration ................................................................... 496
38.3 Interface Management.................................................................... 498
38.4 Interface Configuration Entry Add .................................................. 510
38.5 Interface Configuration Entry Add .................................................. 511
38.6 Call List ........................................................................................... 513
38.7 Call Entry Add................................................................................. 515
38.8 Working Hop List ............................................................................ 521
38.9 Add Working Hop List..................................................................... 523
vi A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.10 Protecting Hop List ..................................................................... 525

38.11 Add Protecting Hop List ............................................................. 527
38.12 Call Entry Modify ........................................................................ 529
38.13 Current Working/Protecting Hop List.......................................... 537
38.14 LSP List (Call List)...................................................................... 539
38.15 Relocation LSP List .................................................................... 542
38.16 LSP List Hop Table Entry Add ................................................... 544
38.17 LSP Entry Details ....................................................................... 546
38.18 Tunnel List AR Hop table ........................................................... 557
38.19 GMPLS Tunnel Hop List Config ................................................. 559
38.20 Tunnel List C Hop table.............................................................. 561
38.21 GMPLS tunnel List PPRO Hop Table ........................................ 563
38.22 LSP List ...................................................................................... 565
38.23 Overall Performace .................................................................... 566
38.24 RSVP Performance .................................................................... 568
39 IF7FE2GEL2 card 571
39.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config ........................................................ 571
39.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Add ....................................................... 591
39.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify................................................... 593
39.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add......................................... 595
39.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify..................................... 596
39.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config ............................................. 598
39.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add........................................ 601
39.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify ................................... 602
39.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config........................................... 603
39.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add ................................. 606
39.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify............................. 607
39.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config.......................................................... 608
39.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config ................................... 610
39.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information.................................. 624
39.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration ............................................. 627
39.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add ................................................... 629
39.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify............................................... 630
39.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information ................................. 631
39.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config...................................................... 633
39.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config .............................. 635
39.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info............................................................. 636
39.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config.............................................. 640
39.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details.................................... 642
39.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify .................................... 645
39.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info................................... 648
39.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug .................................... 650
39.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config ...................................................... 653
39.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add .............................. 654
39.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify............................................. 656
39.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details ............................................ 658
39.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info ........................................... 659
39.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info ....................................... 660
39.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details .................................. 662
39.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config........................................ 664
39.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add .................................. 666
39.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info........................... 667
39.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details .................................. 670
40 IFS10GBE 673
40.1 IFS10GBE Config ........................................................................... 673
40.2 IFS10GBE Port Provisioning Config............................................... 674
40.3 IFS10GBE Card Label Info............................................................. 675
40.4 IFS10GBE Port Config ................................................................... 677
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 vii
40.5 IFS10GBE Vlan Traffic Flow........................................................... 679

40.6 IFS10GBE ETH Traffic Flow........................................................... 681
40.7 IFS10GBE GFP Group Selection ................................................... 682
40.8 IFS10GBE VC4 Selection............................................................... 683
40.9 IFS10GBE ETH <n> Traffic Flow ................................................... 684
40.10 IFS10GBE GFP Group <n> Traffic Flow.................................... 685
40.11 IFS10GBE GFP <n> Traffic Flow............................................... 686
40.12 GFP Group Selection ................................................................. 687
40.13 ETH Configuration...................................................................... 688
40.14 GFP Group Frame performance ................................................ 691
40.15 Asic data information.................................................................. 694
40.16 LCAS State Configuration .......................................................... 695
41 Security 697
41.1 Access Information ......................................................................... 697
41.2 NMS NE Password ......................................................................... 698
41.3 Change Password to Default.......................................................... 699
42 Software 701
42.1 Software Management ................................................................... 701
42.2 Software Download ........................................................................ 703
42.3 Delta Software Download ............................................................... 704
42.4 Active APS Record ......................................................................... 705
42.5 APS Compatibility Information........................................................ 706
43 Fault Clearance 707
43.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance ................................ 707
43.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................... 709
43.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance....................................... 713
43.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance............................................... 718
43.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance........................................... 721
43.6 TIF Fault Clearance ........................................................................ 724
43.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance................................................................ 725
44 How to... (General Tasks) 727
44.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings ................................................... 727
44.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping ...................................... 728
44.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards...................................... 729
44.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports .......................................... 730
44.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations
from Object to Object ...................................................................... 731
44.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object............... 732
44.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging ............................... 733
45 How to... (Timing) 735
45.1 How to Configure the Timing .......................................................... 735
45.2 How to Set Sync Priorities .............................................................. 737
46 How to... (Alarms) 739
46.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling................................ 739
46.2 How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................ 740
46.3 How to Configure TIF Ports ............................................................ 741
47 How to... (Cross Connections) 743
47.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options .................... 743
47.2 How to Create a Cross Connection ................................................ 744
47.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection .................. 745
47.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection .................... 746
47.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection .................... 747
47.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection........... 748
viii A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.7 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12-nv/VC3-2v Cross Connection 749

47.8 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12-nv/VC3-2v Cross Connection. 751
47.9 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection ............................ 753
47.10 How to Add and Remove Path Protections................................ 754
47.11 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection............................ 755
47.12 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection .......................... 756
47.13 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ........... 757
47.14 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection.................. 758
47.15 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection .................................... 759
47.16 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ............................... 760
48 How to... (OH Cross Connections) 761
48.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options ............. 761
48.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection ....................................... 762
48.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection ................................ 763
49 How to... (Protections) 765
49.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection ....................... 765
49.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection.......................... 767
49.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection.......................... 768
49.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings ............... 769
49.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection........................... 770
49.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection....................... 772
49.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or
SF160G Card Protection................................................................. 773
49.8 How to Create an SNCP Protection ............................................... 774
49.9 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path............... 775
49.10 How to Set Up the Squelching Table ......................................... 777
49.11 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link ............................... 779
50 How to... (GMPLS) 781
50.1 How to set up a GMPLS domain .................................................... 781
50.2 How to create TE Links .................................................................. 786
50.3 How to create Component Link ...................................................... 788
50.4 How to Modify TE Links.................................................................. 789
50.5 How to Delete TE Links .................................................................. 792
50.6 How to Create Unprotected Call..................................................... 793
50.7 How to Delete Unprotected Call ..................................................... 795
50.8 How to Create Protected (1+1 PP) Call.......................................... 796
50.9 How to Create Permanent Protected (1+1 PP) + DSR Call ........... 798
50.10 How To Delete Protected Call.................................................... 800
50.11 How to Migrate From an Unprotected Call to a Protected One . 801
50.12 How to Migrate From a Protected Call to an Unprotected One . 802
51 How to... (Concatenations) 803
51.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations ......................................... 803
51.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations ......................................... 804
52 How to... (GFP Configurations) 805
52.1 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups ................................... 805
52.2 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel......................... 806
53 How to... (Data and Software Handling) 807
53.1 How to Download VCDB Files........................................................ 807
53.2 How to Upload VCDB Files ............................................................ 808
54 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) 809
54.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH................................... 809
54.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH ................................................ 810
54.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC..... 813
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 ix
54.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ................ 816

54.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB ............................................................. 819
54.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend ............................................................ 820
55 Index 821
x A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
1.1 Abbreviations
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AK TPDU Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APD Avalanche Photo Diode
APS Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching
AS Alarm Suppression
ASBR Autonomous System Border Router
ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)
ASW Application SoftWare
AU Administrative Unit
AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
AUX Auxiliary channel
BASW BAsic SoftWare
BBE Background Block Error
BDM Background Debug Mode interface
BER Bit Error Ratio
CC Cross Connect / Cross Connection
CD Collision Detection
CE Communauté Européenne
CF Card Failure
CFG Configuration
CH Channel
CL Configuration Log
CLNS ConnectionLess Network layer Service
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 1
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
CLR Clear
CLU Central Clock Unit
CP Connection Protection
CPL Current Problem List
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS Card Release State
CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1
CSO Card Switch Off
CT Card Type
CTP Connection Termination Point
CUG Closed User Group
DB Data Base
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus
DCCM DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)
DCCR DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DEC Decimal
DEMUX Demultiplexer
DL Data Link
DNU Do Not Use
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DSP Domain Specific Part
E4 Electrical interface signal
EBC Error Block Count
ECC Embedded Communication Channel
2 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
ECCM ECC for Multiplex section
ECCR ECC for Regeneration section
EDI Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EM Element Manager
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EPS Equipment Protection Switch
ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)
ESD ElectroStatic Discharge
ESM-Core Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETH Ethernet
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EXC Excessive bit error rate
F Standardized interface for connection of the operating terminal
FAA Fan Alarm Adapter
FAS Frame Alignment Signal
FC/PC Connector type
FE Far End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
FERF Far End Receive Failure
FG Functional Group
FIFO First In First Out
FM Fault Management
FO Fiber Optic
FOD Fiber Optic Distributor
FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 3
FOT Fail of Topology
FTA File Transfer Area
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FU Functional Unit
FW Firmware
GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GTP Group Termination Point
GUI Graphical User Interface
HW HardWare
HEL Historical Event Log
HEX Hexadecimal
HO Higher Order
ICB Internal Control Bus
ICS Internal Communication System
ICU Internal Control Unit
ID Identification
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IDP Initial Domain Part
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Interface
IF2M Electrical E1 interface card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s
IF345M PDH Interface 34/45 Mbit/s
IFO155M Optical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFO155M-E Electrical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFOFE Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet card
IFOFE-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-4 or VC-3
4 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFOFES-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-3 or VC12
IFQ2G5, IFQ2G5B Optical STM-16 card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFQ622M Optical STM-4 card, Quad 622 Mbit/s, SFP
IFQGBE Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card
IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card
IFQGBEB Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator

functionality
IFQGBEB-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator

functionality
IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card
IFS10G, IFS10GB Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s
IFS10G-M Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM
IFS10G-R Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM
IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes
IFS2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s
IFS2G5B Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s
IFSOA Interface Single Optical Amplifier
IFSOA-PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier-PDC
IFSOB Interface Single Optical Booster
IFSOB-PDC Interface Single Optical Booster-PDC
IMN Installation Manual
IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source
INT Internal Supervision
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IS Intermediate System
ISDH Internal SDH Signal
ISF ISDH Signal Fail
ISO International Standards Organization
ISTM Internal Synchronous Transport Module
ISU ISDH Switch Layer Unit
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 5
ITMN Installation and Test Manual
ITU International Telecommunication Union
K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching
KBUS K-byte BUS for MSP Control
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on D Channel
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LNQ622M PDH Extension Link Card
LO Lower Order
LO SF Lower Order Switching Fabric
LOF Loss of Frame
LOL Loss of Lock
LOM Loss of Marker
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOS Loss of Signal
LSDB Link State Data Base
LSU Line Switching Unit
LT Line Termination
LT0 Loss of T0 clock
LTI Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)
LTS Loss of Timing Source
MAC Media Access Control
MACAT Media Access Control Address Table
MCF Message Communication Functions
MDI Multiple Document Interface
MIB Management Information Base
6 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MIBS Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer
MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace
MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Trace
MMC Multimedia Card
MMI Man Machine Interface
MS Multiplex Section
MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication
MSFERF Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection
MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Function
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTS Multiplexer Timing Source
MTTR Mean Time to Repair
NC/P Network Connection Protection
NCT Network Craft Terminal
NE Network Element
NEC Network Element Controller
NEAP Network Element Alarm Panel
NMS Network Management System
NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OAS Optical Amplifier Section
OGL Operator Guidelines
OH Overhead
OHCC Overhead Cross Connections
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 7
OHF Overhead Functions
OH-IF Overhead Interface
OGL Operator Guidelines
OOF Out of Frame
OS Optical Section
OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio
OSPF Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)
P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal
P Protection
PCS Plesiochronous Connection Supervision
PCU Peripheral Control Unit
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PET Possible Equipping Table
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PLM Payload Mismatch
PLP Packet Level Protection
PM Performance Management or Performance Monitoring
POH Path Overhead
POM Path Overhead Monitoring
PP Path Protection
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
PSE Path Switching Event
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTI Path Trace Identifier
Q Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network
8 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN
QECC Q-Interface via DCC
Q-F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal
QOS Quality of Service
QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT
Qx Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network
RAM Random Access Memory
RAP Reachable Address Prefix
RD Read
RDI Remote Defect Indication
REI Remote Error Indication
RFI Remote Failure Indication
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer
RL Remote Loop
RLC Remote Loop Control
ROM Read-Only Memory
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RTC Real Time Clock
RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier
Rx Receiver
SC Connector Type
SCOH Central Controller Card
SD Signal Degraded
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface
SEC Synchronous Equipment Clock
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second(s)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 9
SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator
SETS Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"
SF Signal Fail
SF160G Central VC-4 Switch Card
SF2G5 Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card
SF10G Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card
SFP Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)
SNCP/I Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring
SNCP/N Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring
SNPA Sub-Network Point of Attachment
SOH Section Overhead
SPO Spontaneous Alarm
SQM Sequence Mismatch
SSF Server Signal Fail
SSM Synchronization Status Message
SSU Synchronzation Supply Unit
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module Level N
SUG Supervisory Unequipped Generation
SUM Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring
SW Software
T0 System Clock
T1 Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal
T3 Input for External Clock Reference Signal
T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal
TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm
TCP Termination Connection Point
TxDeg Transmit Degraded
TED Technical Description
TxFail Transmission Fail
10 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TIF Telemetry Interface
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TMP Timestamp
TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
TTP Trail Termination Point
TP Termination Point
TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TSF Trail Signal Fail
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group
Tx Transmitter
TXDeg Transmit Degrade Signal
TXFAIL Transmit Failure
UAS Unavailable Second(s)
UAT Unavailable Time
UMN User Manual
UNEQ Unequipped
USI User Interface
UTIF Universal Transmission Internal Interface
VC Virtual Container
VC-n Virtual Container Level n
VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block
VCnTTP VCn Trail Termination Point
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WLS WDM Longspan System
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 11
WR Write
WTR Wait to Restore time
12 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
2.1 Using this Help System

This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070,
repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").
Displaying help topics
In the Help menu, click Help Topics...
The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents,
an index, and a full-text search function.
Displaying the help of the currently open window
Press the F1 key
or
Click the question mark button in the toolbar
or
in the Help menu, click On Window... F1.
Displaying information on the software
In the Help menu, click About...
Printing help windows
To start the printout click the print button in the toolbar.
In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN
manual.
Notes
Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.
If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding
SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases,
there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 13
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features

The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and cross-
connect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as
• TMX (terminal multiplexer),
• ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or
• small LXC (local cross-connect).
in multi-service access and edge network applications.
The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point

connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.
According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:
• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,
• Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),
• Feeder network functionalities.
The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional
sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features,
such as:
• Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,
• Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,
• Virtual concatenation,
• Contiguous concatenation,
• Single fiber operation with optical splitter,
• 2-fiber ring protection,
• 4-fiber ring protection,
• Closed User Groups (CUG),
• EOW functions,
• Support of VLAN,
• Support of logical ports,
• IP / OSI tunneling,
• etc.
14 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software

The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists
of the following components:
• Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware.

(HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or
Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software pack-
age.)
• OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack) soft-
ware,
• NE Proxy software,
• TNMS CT software,
• Java Virtual Machine software,
• SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).
[11210]
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 15
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
16 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
3 General
3.1 Date / Time Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> NE Time...
Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values
are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second,
according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.
Current NE Time
The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the
MS Windows control panel.
Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT
The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time
settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 17
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
3.2 Network Element Configuration
> Configuration -> Network Element...
The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.
Value Ranges:
Name 48 Bytes
Location 64 Bytes
Type
Displays the NE type.
Startup Info
Displays information about the latest NE startup.
18 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
NE Unique HW Code
Comprising the NE serial number and family code.
Application Type
An application type name can be inserted.
Second Power Supply Monitoring
If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.
PSE Switch For Whole NE
If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an
activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.
Persistency Time
In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.
Raise Time [0..30 s]
This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be
reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.
Clear Time [1..30 s]
Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The
default clear time is 10 s.
Log Overwrite
Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.
Fault
Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity
"Warning"):
enabled laser shutdown,
enabled port loopbacks,
deactivated ALS on optical interface cards,
active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration),
active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP,
2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of
IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 19
3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack
20 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
Top window segment
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.
The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 21
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
22 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
Bottom window segment
The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.
How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards
How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 23
3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack
24 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
This window is accessible via the toolbar button
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
Top window segment
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.
The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 25
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
26 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
Bottom window segment
The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.
How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 27
3.5 Option Settings
In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at
startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.
Alarm Severity Threshold
Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the
threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities
below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.
For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is
selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.
By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm
summary.
28 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at
application termination.
Open at Startup
Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.
Time Display
Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to
the system time zone of the operation system.
Frequency Display
Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength or channel numbers) with optical
interfaces.
General
Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.
Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.
Disable Apply Button during Outstanding Data can be selected.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 29
3.6 EOW Configurations
> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...
Two Wire Handset:
Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.
Four Wire EM Interface:
Allows to connect to a EOW conference.
30 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
3.7 Neighbour Ports
> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 31
3.8 Script Configuration
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...
This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the
NE.
The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross
connections and SW management.
Top Section
The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:
Symbol Corresponding Menu Description

Item
File -> New File Creates a new empty script

configuration file.
32 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
File -> Open... Opens an existing script configuration

file.
File -> Save As... Saves the script configuration file.
Script -> Execute Starts script configuration.
Script -> Stop Stops script configuration.
Script -> Record Automatically creates a script

configuration file.
For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the
Stop symbol.
For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.
Bottom Section
When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors.
To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.
Syntax
• A semicolon follows every statement.
• A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.
• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given
explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.
• The syntax is not case sensitive.
• Script statements:
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters);
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters);
// <Comment> or /* <comment> */
• An object instance is clearly identified by the following values:

ObjectClass
subrackNumber
slotReference
containerIndex
objectIndex
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 33
The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4

values enclosed in brackets.
Example:
IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1);
refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.
• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The
keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for
performing a SET invoke is:
objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).
Example:
IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);
• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in
the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke
is:
objectInstance.Action (Parameters);
Example:
EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306),
CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));
• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script
configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or
commands. The syntax for the Wait command is:
Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);
Example: Wait(1000);
• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be
repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of
execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is:
Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user
stop>);
<Qst command 1>;
...
<Qst command n>;
EndLoop;
Examples:
Loop(50);
ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled);
EndLoop;
Loop(*);
faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11));
EndLoop;
• Syntax for the complex QST types:
SEQUENCE
(element 1, element 2, ... element n)
SEQUENCE OF BYTE
(byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)
Example for ACTION:

ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"),
0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);
34 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
SET OF
(element 1, element 2, ..., element n)
CHOICE
<choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>
Example:
vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 35
36 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Extension Shelf Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
4 Extension Shelf
4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration
> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...
This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be
added to the Module View.
The main shelf name (see table below) appears as Subrack 1.
Subrack ID Subrack Type
1 Main Shelf
2 Microshelf #1
3 Microshelf #2
4 Microshelf #3
5 Microshelf #4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 37
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Extension Shelf
4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using
the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
Displays the card state.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Master System Microshelf
Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.
38 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Subrack Equipping Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
5 Subrack Equipping
5.1 Possible Equipping Information
> Information -> Possible Equipping...
This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible
equipping of every slot with cards.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 39
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Subrack Equipping
5.2 Actual Equipping Information
> Information -> Actual Equipping...
This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping
of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure
that the desired information can be found efficiently.
40 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Subrack Equipping Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
5.3 Card Inventory Summary
> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...
This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all
configured cards:
ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 41
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Subrack Equipping
5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config
This window is accessible via the card symbol, by using the command Configuration ->
Card... of the popup menu
This window allows selecting the protection shelf number.
42 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Label Information Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
6 Card Label Information
6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 43
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Label Information
6.2 PDH Cards Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
44 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information
an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 45
6.4 CLU Card Label info
This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a CLU card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
46 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
6.5 SCOH Card Label Information
the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 47
6.6 IF2M Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack
or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card
Label...
48 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
6.7 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information
an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 49
6.8 Booster Cards Label Information
an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
50 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
7 Card Configuration
7.1 Card Equipment Configuration
This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and
selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.
This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or
protection if available).
If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly.
When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will
automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 51
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
7.2 SCOH Card Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
EOW Active
Activates the Engineering Order Wire function.
Carries Overhead Connections
Displays the current connections.
52 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.3 CLU Card Configuration
a CLU symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
Actual Clock Master
Displays the actual clock master.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards need not have
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 53
Slot number of working card
The slot number of the card involved in LO switching protection e.g. crossconnections, path
protection, non-intrusive path monitoring, etc.
Note: the LO switching fabric cards perform path monitoring.
Selected switching fabric
This kind of protection is made on switching fabric cards, and it is basically made of a set of
two cross-connections from (Head End) or to (Tail End) the same resource.
Displays the create and delete cross-connections in the switching fabric.
54 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.4 SF160G Card Configuration
an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
Low order switching protection states
Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 55
7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration
These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context
menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Carries Traffic Connections
Carries Overhead Connections
56 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Note:
The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.
The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 57
7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack
SF2G5 / SF10G - 2Mbit Connection - Slot 301
The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross
connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)
In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12
cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208,
211) can be cross connected.
Workaround:
For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and
configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070
SC subrack.
For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted
and configured at any other traffic slot.
SF10G - VC4 Connection - Slot 301
Limitation:
In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and
#52 are invisible.
Reason:
Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63
ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.
Workaround:
If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at
another traffic slot but not on slot 301.
SF2G5/SF10G - Card Protection - Slot 301/302
In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP)
it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch
card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross
connections already exists.
58 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol ->
Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Possible card states:
enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.
User Label
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Current Selected Low Order Switching Fabric
Monitored channel NE
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 59
One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out
simultaneously).
Monitored Channel Direction (for IF345M only)
PDH-in or PDH-out can be set.
Used in Protection
Indicates if the card is used in a protection.
AIS Insertion
Enables the AIS insertion to insert a manual AIS towards the port.
60 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards
an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 61
7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration
the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
Connection 40G Reference:
Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE.
Connection Reference
In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured
correctly.
62 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
VLAN Concentrator Functionality State:
VLAN cards can be configured in 3 different modes:
P2P – Point to Point mode
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 63
Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality.
All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.
VLAN C – VLAN Concentrator mode
Card is working in pure VLAN mode with 2 concentrators.

ETH port #1 = concentrator #1
ETH port #3 = concentrator #2
ETH port #2 and ETH port #4 are switched off in this mode
Mixed – Mixed mode
Card is working in a mixed mode with

ETH port #1 and ETH port #2 running in P2P mode, without VLAN functionality.
ETH port #3 is working as VLAN concentrator #2.
ETH port #4 is switched off.
Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings
( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.
64 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.11 Card Configuration for IF4FE4GEB

IF4FE4GEB Ethernet card configuration (optical)
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Port Monitoring State/Port Operation State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state/port operation state.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 65
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Remote Fault Indication
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).
Laser Data:
Input Power Level [dBm]
Displays the current input power level.
Transmit Frequency [THz]
Displays the current transmit frequency.
Receive Frequency [THz]
Displays the current receive frequency.
Output Power Level [dBm]
Displays the current output power level.
Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.
66 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.12 Card Configuration for IF4FE4GEB Ethernet

IF4FE4GEB Ethernet card configuration (electrical)
Supervision
not used ports.
Flow Control
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 67
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is
disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is
inserted, the ETH link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the
MAC on the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are
sent any longer in both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As
a consequence also the packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH ->
SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH
port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the
ETH link partner raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router
which considers a physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing
process (e.g. a redundant path is available).
68 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.13 IFSO* Cards Configuration
an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
of a card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 69
7.14 Port Provisioning Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
In case of an optical interface card:

Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.
70 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.15 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config
The window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 71
72 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.16 IF4FE4GEB Port Provisioning Configuration

A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 73
7.17 IFO155 Port Provisioning Configuration

74 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
7.18 TP_Reservation
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Location
A list of the reserved TPs is presented. The list will contain the location of the TPs.
Object
Ethernet port object (the involved GFP object)
TP Address
The termination point address
Reserved for GMPLS
GMPLS interface information configured by the operator (e.g. TP reservation, local and
remote TE-Link identifiers)
GMPLS interface information configured by management will be stored persistently and

needs to be consistent between both ends of a link.
Call name
The canonical name assigned to the call
Call Id
The CALL ID to be used on this call
Egress
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 75
The egress label to be used.
Ingress
The Ingress label to be used.
76 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
8 Timing
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration
> SEC...
In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each
timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing
always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is
used for the timing derivation.
A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a
timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization
reference.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 77
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3
timing source.
Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of
an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For
further information, see below ("Forced").
The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4.
The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.
Note:
T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:
• Reference source is not available in fource mode
• None of the configured reference sources is available in automatic or manual mode
• Manually by the operator command "OFF"
• In the mode "forced T0" if T0 is in holdover or free running mode
• QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than
the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11-
SEC, 0-off
T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched
in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and
"DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).
The modes involved are as follows:
Auto:
The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the
best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6
= very bad/do not use).
Forced:
You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second
arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected
timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after
expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning.
The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately.
The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry
of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.
If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no

longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.
If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the
Free Running mode.
78 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Use SSM for Selection checkbox

With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the
Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).
The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received
STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are
used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the
DNU display, the received value is the displayed.
S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level
xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1
xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2
xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3
xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4
xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5
xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6
How to Configure the Timing
How to Set Sync Priorities
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 79
8.2 T0 Configuration
> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...
Timing Source in Use for T0
Displays the current T0 timing source.
Requested Timing Source for T0
The T0 clock pulse can be derived from
• one of the T3 clock pulses (external),
• T1 clock pulses (if an SDH signal is used as timing reference),
• the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.
- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.

- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
T1 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
80 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing References Tab
Timing References Tab
Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status
Message (SSMs) information. Also it enables and displays available and selected rejected
SSMs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 81
WTR tab
WTR Tab
Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.
T0 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
82 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
T3:
T3 2 MHz SSM
Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker.
This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM.
The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.
Quality level Quality level Description

type (decimal value)
PRC 2 Primary Reference Clock:

the normally used high-accuracy timing
source
SSU-T 4 Synchronization Supply Unit Transit
SSU-L 8 Synchronization Supply Unit Local
SEC 11 Synchronous Equipment Clock:

NE internal timing source
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 83
T3 2 Mbit Override SSM
The 2 Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs. In this case, the SSM value is overrided.
T3 2 Mbit Received SSM Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.
T3 Received SSMs
Displays the received quality level information.
Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2) SSM
Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
84 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
T4:
Timing Source in Use for T4
Displays the current T4 timing source.

In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase
quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).
Requested Timing Source for T4
- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.

- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
- Off disconnects the T4 output.
T4 Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.
Minimum Quality Level for T4
Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see
above table).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 85
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
86 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
9 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
9.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 87
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
9.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
88 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 89
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....
menus.
90 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 91
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G
type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus
92 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 93
9.8 ETH Traffic Flow
Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Notes:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
94 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
9.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively ->
Subview...
This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 95
9.10 VC4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the
card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or
VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...
VC4 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
96 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Signal Label:
By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the
user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
VC4 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH
cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx).
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 97
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
VC4 Mux Preparation (if offered)
Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prepare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.
98 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
9.11 VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric
card symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 99
9.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow
This window is accessible by means of the path: Subrack -> Slot -> Card -> Port -> Subview...
100 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
10 Alarms
10.1 Alarm List
The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.
The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm
entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style
for labeling and sorting the list columns.
In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.
Current tab:
The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state
(acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes
(show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.
One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 101
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Location <card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel

number>)
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning
State Either unacknowledged or acknowledged
Time Date and time of alarm
Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue
outline.
Context Menu
Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the
selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm
acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is
changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.
Show alarms with severity
You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.
Show alarms with state
You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.
Alarm Counter
Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.
History tab:
The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is
online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one
particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm
raised
cleared (= no alarm)
102 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPU-
channel/Interface card take place by a list.
The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.
Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.
One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:
Column Description
Object Object name
Location <slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning
Event raised, cleared
Time Time and date of alarm.
Show alarms with severity
The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.
Click Clear History to clear the entire list.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 103
10.2 NEAP Configuration
> Configuration -> NEAP...
The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and
allows to configure the alarm severities.
Column Description
Alarm Type Communication or Equipment
Location Logical correlation or signal type
Alarm Name Alarm designation
Object Involved path or unit
Severity Major, Minor, or No
104 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
10.3 Equipment Alarms
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 105
Column Description
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"
State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm
Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the

red color of the symbol.
No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)

An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.
Time Alarm date and time
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Communication Alarms
TIF Fault Clearance
106 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
10.4 Communication Alarms
This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications
Alarms...
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
Column Description
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 107


Notes:
LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E
card and is not assigned to any port.
VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC
is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.
Equipment Alarms
TIF Fault Clearance
108 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
10.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table

IMPORTANT!
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator
Guidelines).
Communication Alarms
Object Alarm Severity Description Remedial Action
ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination
ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.
ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client
ETH OPT TTP TD Major Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned

SFP soon.
ETH OPT TTP TF Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned

SFP.
ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination
ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.
ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client
GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic
MS AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.

Signal
MS SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop

circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 109
MS SSF Minor Server Signal Fail Check the concerned

configuration settings.
MS RDI Warning Remote Defect Check the output signal of

Indicator the card, which may have
prompted the RDI alarm. If
it is correct, the concerned
card must be replaced.
AU4 LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of

the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T0 is correct, the card must
be replaced.
SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
replaced.
SYNC LOM T3 Minor Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of

#1,#2 the concerned card. If it is
replaced.
SYNC LT4 Minor Loss of T4 Check the input signal of

replaced.
SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T4 is correct, the card must
be replaced.
SYNC LTS T1 #1.. Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
#8 T1 #1.. #8 the concerned card. If it is
replaced.
SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
T3 #1, #2 the concerned card. If it is
replaced.
OS, LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of

OS-CO, the concerned card. If it is
OS-PA correct, the card must be
replaced.
OS, TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned

OS-CO, SFP.
OS-PA
OS, TxDeg Minor Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned

OS-CO, SFP soon.
OS-PA
110 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
RS TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace

Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.
RS LOF Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of

replaced.
RS LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of

replaced.
TU LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of

replaced.
VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
be equal.
VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
be equal.
VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
E12 LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of

replaced.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 111
P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
replaced.
P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.
Signal
P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If the alarm
persists, replace the card.
P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
replaced.
P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If still an EXC alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still an SD alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
replaced.
VC12 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace

be equal.
VC12 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC12 Fault not in home device.
VC12 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop

detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
VC3 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace

be equal.
VC3 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC3 Fault not in home device.
VC3 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop

detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
112 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 113
10.6 E3/VC3 Alarms
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list,
by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...
Column Description
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
114 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619


Equipment Alarms
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 115
10.7 1:N MSP Alarms
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... ->
1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...
Column Description
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
116 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619


Equipment Alarms
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 117
10.8 TIF Configuration
> Configuration -> TIF...
In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for
alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.
How to Configure TIF Ports
118 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
10.9 TCA List
Sorting Scheme (mouse-click on the column header)
The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.
Column sorted by
Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one
object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)
Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of
one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)
TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one
alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)
Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by
object, location, TCA, time.)
Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by
object, location, TCA, event.)
Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 119
Current Tab:
The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is
displayed.
One TCA entry consists of:
Column Description
Object Object name
Location <card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>) <object name>
TCA TCA name
History Tab:
The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as
long as the LCT is online.
The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA
Event: raised, cleared.
TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .
The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This
time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request
initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.
The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the
Registry).
120 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
11 Protection Traffic Flow
11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 121
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context
menu.
122 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow
of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 123
11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
124 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow
of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 125
11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
126 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 127
11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.
128 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow
menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 129
menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
130 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 131
menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
132 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 133
11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...
menus.
134 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 135
11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
menus.
136 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow
menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) ->
Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 137
11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow
of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection ->
Subview...
menus.
138 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 139
140 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
12 Protection Selection Windows
12.1 VC4 Selection with ETH Cards
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 141
142 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
13 Traffic Configuration
13.1 Port Configuration
Connector Location Distributor
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
Port Operational State
Displays the running operation mode.
Loopback (if applicable)
Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.
Fibre Mode (if applicable)
Selection of the fibre mode: Dual Fibre or Single Fibre
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 143
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
Port classification
Selection of the port classification:
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Used in Protection (if applicable)
Used as Timing Source (if applicable)
Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.
Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)
Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current overhead connections.
144 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.2 IF4FE4GEB Port Configuration (Electrical and Optical)
been connected.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 145
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Remote Fault Laser Shutdown
Enable / Disable
146 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.3 Port Configuration for IFQ2G5
been connected.
Loopback (
Selection to enable or to disable internal / external loops
Port classification
• non GMPLS
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 147
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Used in Protection (if applicable)
Used as Timing Source (if applicable)
Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.
Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)
Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current overhead connections.
148 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.4 IFQGBEB Port configuration
been connected.
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 149
13.5 STM-N Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...
OS tab:
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
not used ports.
150 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Force Laser Shutdown
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When
enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal.
If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one
single fiber), ALS should be enabled.
Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]
Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser
restart period.
Manual Laser Restart
If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.
No Optical Preamplifier Connected (Normal Mode) (if applicable)
The checkbox is set, if no optical preamplifier is used.
Laser Frequency
Enable the laser frequency configuration (if applicable)
SBS Suppression
Enable the SBS Suppression configuration (if applicable)
Laser Data:
Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical
interface.
RS tab:
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 151
If checkbox is set:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
No checkbox setting:
Automatic Link Information
If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which
defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.
Actually Transmitted:
This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.
Transmitted / Expected:
according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
Received:
MS tab:
M0 Byte Enable Switch
Disable: only M1-byte is used for REI transmission

Enable: additional M0-byte is used for REI transmission
Note: In case of interworking with SL64, disable the M0-byte switch.
Received Timing Marker
Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide
and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are
treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received
value is the displayed.
S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level
xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1
152 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2
xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3
xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4
xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5
xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6
Overwrite Received SSM
The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock
source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.
Force don’t use for Sync
By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as
timing source.
Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 153
13.6 AU4/VC4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Configuration...
AU4/VC4 Misc tab:
Supervision
If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.
If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad
Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).
Blocks (B3).
154 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
VC4 Trail Trace tab:
TTI Processing
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields
expected and received TTI are displayed.
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
Expected
Received
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 155
13.7 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP
For VC3:
This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...
For VC12:
The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close.
In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1) -
> Configuration...
VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
156 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types,
expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
not equal
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix.
Disabled:
Expected
Received
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 157
13.8 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the
port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list ->
Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...
VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)
158 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
Expected
Received
VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
not equal
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for
ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Disabled:
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 159
ASCII
The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the
range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
Received
160 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.9 ETH Configuration
Supervision
not used ports.
Asymmetric Flow Control (to link partner)
If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to
the link partner if
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 161
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
- with subchanneling, when the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.
Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will
not reduce the speed.
Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the
following will occur:
In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will
react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different
admission control or VC capacity.
Auto-negotiation (only with IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFOFE-E or IFOFES-E card)
Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN
equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off
Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".
Enabled:
Note:
Disabled:
path is available).
Laser Data:
162 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
SFPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 163
13.10 E12 Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list,
by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...
Supervision
not used ports.
P12
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
164 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
P12 Mapping Supervision
Port Connection Supervision
disabled = no supervision
enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction
The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.
If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and
T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.
CRC-4 Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction.
If the switch is
disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is
only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.
P12 Demapping Processing
Supervision/Retiming
This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled,
the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then
supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised
and is transmitted transparently.
The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset
between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the
SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a
reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.
CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If
the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC
Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination
port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the
termination port monitoring is enabled.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 165
13.11 E3 Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3
-> Configuration...
Supervision
not used ports.
P3
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
166 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
13.12 IFSOA – Config
an xxxxxx card symbol -> Information ->
been completed.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 167
Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the cards
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE
In case of Internal Interconnection, the connected I cards must be configured correctly.
Optical Input Power
Force Laser Shutdown
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
168 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Multiplex Structure Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
14 Multiplex Structure
14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure
This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a IF345
symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux) #n
symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 169
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Multiplex Structure
170 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
15 Cross Connections
15.1 Cross Connections List
or via the Main Menu -> CrossConnections -> CC List...
In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross
connections).
There are different CC types as follows:
1. Unidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:

CP1, indicating the CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the CP used as connection end point
2. Bidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:

CP1, indicating the 1st CP used as connection start/end point
CP2, indicating the 2nd CP used as connection start/end point
3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point
CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
5. Bidirectional (protected for SNCP) CC, with CP parameter set:

CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 171
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more
than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more
than one CC.
7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the
end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF
card.
8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is
missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card
and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but
no other CC from the LO to an HO card.
The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment...
button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.
How to Create a Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete a Cross Connection
172 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
15.2 Plain Cross Connections List
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> CC Plain List...
The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this
window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.
The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection
Graphic Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 173
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete a Cross Connection
174 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
15.3 Add Cross Connection
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Add.
This window allows to create a new cross connection.
The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.
After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP A field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B’ field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection).
The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.
Note:
The VC-Level LCAS-VC12-nv/VC3-nv is a possibilty to connect the complete VC group from

the ETH card to a SDH card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 175
It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1,
1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group.
In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e.
1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).
The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross
connection list.
The Connect button creates the cross connection.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
176 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
15.4 Cross Connection Details
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Details...
After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed
below.
The Config... button opens the AU4/VC4 Configuration window
With an IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFOFES-E, IFOFGE, IFQGBE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-

E card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.
After selecting a list entry the following buttons are active:
The Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window
The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 177
15.5 Cross Connections Graphic
This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...
This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards,
sorted by cross connection protocols.
The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC
column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own
termination points.
The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC
column.
If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.
Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.
178 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Add...
Opens the Add Cross Connection window.
List...
Opens the Cross Connections List window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 179
15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...
This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of
the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections
List, if applicable.
180 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
15.7 Modify Cross Connection
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...
This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.
The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.
The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a
TP B' termination point.
The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the
selected connection.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 181
15.8 Overhead Cross Connections
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.
OH TP List tab:
Filter:
The OH Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.
The OH TP List displays all OH termination points.
Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first
column).
Column Description
(Symbol) Indication if this TP is involved in an OH CC
or not
182 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The symbol is marked by a blue frame, if the TP is already set as

TP A or TP B, but not yet connected.
OH Termination Point Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.
Connection State Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross

Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.
OH CC Type <type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>
Direction Displays the direction type of the OH TP
Involved As One of: TPA, TPB
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.
If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details
about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.
Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset
TPs button.
The Connect button creates a new OH CC.
OH CC List tab:
Filter:
The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options.
The OH CC list displays all established Cross Connections.
Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading.
One Cross Connection entry consists of:
Column Description
OH CC Type Cross Connection type.
Direction Displays the direction type of the OH CC type
TP A, TP B Termination points
The Disconnect button deletes the selected OH CC from the list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 183
How to Create an OH Cross Connection
How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete OH Cross Connections
184 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Management Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
16 Protection Management
16.1 Protection Management
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -
> Protection...
This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the
currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.
Column Description
Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active
Type Type of protection switching
Exists either yes or no
Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protect. State State of protection switching
To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.
Create
Creates the selected protection in the list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 185
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Management
Add 1:N MSP ...
Opens the Add 1:N MSP window.
Add Link Protection
Opens the Add Extension Link Protection window.
Delete
Deletes the selected protection in the list.
186 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 plus 1 MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection
17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration
of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1
MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).
Working
Displays the working port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting port.
MSP Control:
Active Line Section
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 187
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 plus 1 MSP Protection
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed:

Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.

Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).

The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.
188 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
18 1 to 1 MSP Protection
18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview... -
> 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1:1 MSP).
Working
Protecting
MSP Control:
Active Line Section
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 189
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 MSP Protection
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Extra Traffic Squelch State
Displays the Extra Traffic Squelch State.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed:

Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
disappeared.
Operator Command

Lockout prevents any 1:1 MSP protection switching.
Exercise Switch is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can
be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Availability State

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
to the protection card.
190 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 N MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
19 1 to N MSP Protection
19.1 1:N MSP Configuration
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP ->
Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays 1:N line architecture.
Protecting
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 191
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 N MSP Protection
Displays the protection card and port.
Working:
The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.
The Extend... button opens the 1:N MSP Extension window.
The Reduce button removes the port from the list.
MSP Control:
Switching State
Displays the switching state.
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type:

disappeared.
Operator Command
Allows to set the priority of the protection switching:
Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching.
The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request
Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Operator Command Port
Displays the operator command port.
Line Switching Type
Displays the line switching type.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.
Availability State

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]
Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.
MSP Activation
Allows to select the protection switching function state.
192 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Note:
to the protection card
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 193
19.2 Add 1:N MSP
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...
Bitrate
Allows to set the bit rate level.
Protection Port
Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.
Working Ports:
This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the
corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.
The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.
After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.
The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.
The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.
194 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
19.3 1:N MSP Extension
menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list ->
Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...
Worker Section Number
Displays the worker section number.
Worker Priority
Allows to configure the worker priority.
Additional Working Port

Allows to configure an additional working port.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 195
19.4 Add Working Ports
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...
After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected
Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.
The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP
window.
196 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
19.5 Working STM-1 Selection
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 ->
Subview...
This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 197
19.6 Working VC4 Selection
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
198 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
20.1 2F SPRING Configuration
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING ->
Configuration...
This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).
East / West
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 199
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
Displays the assigned ports.
2F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.

disappeared.
Operator Command

Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type

Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Configure Ring Topology
Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.
200 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 201
20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...
particular items.
Note:
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
East / West
202 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F-SPRING Control:
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)
Extra Traffic East Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode

disappeared.
Operator Command

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State

MSP Activation
Note: In case of a deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 203
Squelch...
204 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.3 4F SPRING Configuration
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... -> 4F-
SPRING -> Configuration...
particular items.
Note:
Ring Architecture
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 205
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
4F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West
Protection Mode

disappeared.
Operator Command West / Operator Command East

The Forced commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
K1/K2 Protocol Type

Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841
Availability State

MSP Activation
Squelch...
206 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 207
20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration
of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology
In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.
Note:
Number of ring nodes [3..16]
Enter the number of the ring nodes.
208 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.
Own Node ID [0..15]
Enter your own node ID.
Ring Map
Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.
2F-SPRING Configuration
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration
4F-SPRING Configuration
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 209
20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Squelch...
Squelch Event Report Control
Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.
Squelch State
Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.
Squelch Table
Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.
210 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING
of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 211
20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
menus.
212 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> n
x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 213
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...
menus.
214 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING
of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 215
of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
menus.
216 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra
menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 217
of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...
menus.
218 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config
This window is accessible by means of the path:
Slot -> Card -> Traffic Flow -> 4F-SPRING Symbol...
Nut table
It is possible for the selected AU4 No. to enable or disable the Ring Switch, Span switch.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 219
20.15 4F-Spring X Config
Slot -> Card -> Traffic Flow -> 4F-SPRING Symbol...
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
220 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)
Extra Traffic East Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set.
K1/K2 protocol type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays wether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked
state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive)
Enter the wait restore time.
MSP Activation
Note: In case of deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 221
222 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Link Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
21 Link Protection
21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...
This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and
gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 223
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Link Protection
21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration
menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINK-
PROT -> Configuration...
Working
Displays the working card and port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting card and port
Extension Link Protection Control:
Active Link Section
Displays the active link section.
Operator Command
Allows to select a protection command to be performed.
224 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
21.3 Add Extension Link Protection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...
Main Shelf:
Working Port
Allows to select the working port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.
Protecting Port
Allows to select the protecting port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.
Extension Shelf:
SUBRACK
Allows to select the subrack.
Working Port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 225
Protecting Port
226 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
not used ports.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 227
21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
With the field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
not used ports.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.
228 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
22 Concatenations
22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 229
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -
> Subview...
menus.
230 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a
IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 ->
[VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 231
of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 ->
VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...
menus.
232 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 233
22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection
of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview
This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
234 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
22.7 VC12-2v Configuration
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Subview...
VC12-2v Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 235
22.8 Concatenation Configuration
The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu
of an
ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G:
Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
SDH cards:
Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
This window allows you to select templates for concatenation groups.
236 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Note:
With the IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards, the user
must select a template (see below).
For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4
multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.
IFOFES-E:
(via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4 -
> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card.
A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4.
With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.
SF2G5/SF10G:
(via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The
default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.
If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details
window.
The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.
The Delete button (if offered) deletes the selected entry.
The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.
The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection
window.
The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured
VC4-nv groups.
The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
The following templates are available:
For the IFOFE / IFOFE-E card:
Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)
Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-5v, 1xVC4-4v)
Template 7 (6xVC3, 6xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 237
Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)
For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:
Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)
Template 13 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 6xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
238 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
22.9 Concatenation Details
a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button
a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button
This windows displays details about the selected concatenation group.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 239
22.10 Add Concatenation Group
an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...
Concatenation Type
Select the required type from the list.
Group ID
Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.
Available TPs / Selected TPs
Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.
240 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
22.11 Concatenation Group Templates
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...
This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.
Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be
selected. High order VC´s (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
GFP Assignment
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 241
22.12 Modify Template
an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) ->
Modify Template...
This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.
Note:
Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.
Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.
242 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
22.13 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration
Slot -> Card -> Port -> VC<used LO–Concatenation> <id> Config...
Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 243
244 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
23 VLAN
23.1 VLAN Functionality
General remarks on VLAN functionality

VLAN functionality is supported by the IFQGBEB (optical) and IFQGBEB-E (electrical) cards.
These card types can be configured in 3 different modes.
1. Point to point mode (P2P)

All 4 ETH ports working P2P like IFQGBE /-E cards.
2. VLAN C mode
Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators:
VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1
VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3
ETH ports #2 and #4 are switched OFF in this mode.
There is a fixed relation between Concentrator -- GFP Group -- VC as follows:

ETH port #1 - VLAN C1 -- GFP group #1 - #8 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 1-16.
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9 - #16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32.
3. Mixed Mode
Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN
concentrator functionality as follows:
ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32
ETH port #4 - switched OFF
Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied
card configuration.
Uplink and Downlink functionality
On VLAN modes it is distinguished between uplink and downlink.
Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators
C1 and C2 are internally connected to.
Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.
These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via
the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.
Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream
direction):
• Receiving ethernet frames on assigned VCs with GFP encapsulation
• Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN
ID Assignment)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 245
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
• Decapsulating ethernet frame (removal of GFP header)
• Inserting of VLAN Tag in ethernet frame
• Sending out tagged frame on gigabit uplink
• Processing of up to 8 GFP groups
• Processing of up to 8 subchannels per GFP group
Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream
direction):
• Receiving of VLAN tagged frame on gigabit uplink port
• CRC and VLAN tag present check
• Determination of downlink VC - GFP channel for received tagged ethernet frame

according to user derfined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)
• Removal of VLAN tag
• Removal of ETH frames with not determined VLAN tag
• Encapsulating of ethernet frame into GFP frames
• Mapping GFP encapsulated ethernet frame in assigned downlink VC
Note: On the downlink VC, only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned.

Regarding the Concatination Config for VLAN modes its therefore recommended to use
template 18 in case of VLAN C mode and template 19 or 20 in case of Mixed mode.
Tag interpretation in VLAN modes
VLAN Tag format accoding to 802.1q:
Type Field
• Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged
frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream
Priority Field
• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)
• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)
CFI Field
• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)
• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)
246 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN ID
• 1 ... 4094 freely configurable
Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs
(i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).
Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than
68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after
the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding
a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.
Mutual influence of downstream speeds through flowcontrol on gigabit upstream port
Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not
support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of
VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port
assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of
admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit
upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached
through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the
assigned downstream VC capacity.
If a downstream VC is overrunned, two scenarios have to be considered:
• Asymmetric Flow Control is enabled on the gigabit uplink port.

MAC control frames (Pause) will be send out on the gigabit port. Since pause frames
cannot be classified all the VLAN streams of the device connected to the gigabit uplink
port will be slowed down to the speed of the overrunned downstream VC.
• Asymmetric Flow Control is disabled on the gigabit uplink port.

Frames in downstream direction will be discarded in case the assigned downstream VC
capacity is exceeded.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 247
23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP
group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has yet been done.
The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each VLAN
concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.
Note for VLAN operation:
The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as
the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):
248 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected
BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of
the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow
control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the
possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the
activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the
incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 249
23.3 VLAN Selection
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close.
In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview
This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the
VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.
250 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment
State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the
Concatenation Group Templates window.
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 and
VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.
On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH
uplink port #1.
GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.
On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be
assigned.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 251
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3
(uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and
mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
All the GFP to port assignment configuration preconditions apply.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to
not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of
the VC.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
On VLAN ETH cards (ex. IFQGBEBxx), a port defines a set of VlanIDs to which VlanID2Gfp
assignments have to be done. So now, assignments consist on the following two step
assignments
A TP2 Gfp assignment, connecting the resource to a gfpGroup
A Vlan ID 2Gfp assignment, connecting the gfpGroup to a VlanID, referenced by a port.
VLAN C ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Subview window.
VC4 Subview...
252 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 253
23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment
State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
VLAN C-GFP Assignment
On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on
ETH uplink port #3.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.
Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each
ETH port.
The value range is configurable : 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Note:
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
254 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Assignment point to point mode GFP groups #1 and #2

On GFP Group #1 and #2 VCs of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.
extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH
#1 and #2).
dropped.
Assignment VLAN C2 - GFP Groups #9 - #16:
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 & VC4-
nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink
direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping
frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not
overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the
VC.
Equal for all GFP Groups:
The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 255
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all
VLAN & point to point GFPs)!
VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
VLAN C ETH Config...
ETH Config...
VC4 Subview...
256 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...
This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a
separate window, showing the assigned IDs.
The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.
With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.
Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the
concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 257
23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...
In this window, make the necessary VLAN assignment settings.

Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window for VLAN ID assignments.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the
desired VLAN ID for that stream.
If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP
channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID.
In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is
grayed out. (The dim visable `0´ is a default that can be ignored.)
Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this
group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.
VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC3-
2v to that group before.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
VLAN IDs can be freely selected in the area of 1...4094.

VLAN ID 0 and 4095 are reserved as stated in 802.1Q and can therefore not be assigned.
VLAN Functionality
258 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
24 Virtual VCs
24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 259
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
260 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...
Virtual VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the
IFOFES-E cards.
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Blocks (BIP2).
Signal Label: (only IFOFES-E cards)
Transmitted
Expected
Received
Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:
transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 261
received TTI is not equal
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
For SF2G5/SF10G cards:

Enabled:
Disabled:
For IFOFES-E cards:

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
Disabled:
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
262 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -
> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 263
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH
cards.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]
Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]
Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)
Transmitted
Expected
Received
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
264 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
For SF2G5/SF10G cards:

Enabled:
Disabled:
For ETH cards:

Enabled:
Disabled:
st
Received
Virtual VC4 Configuration
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 265
24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration
of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation
Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply.
Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v ->
Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...
Supervision (if available)
RDI/REI Insertion (if available)
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
Blocks (B3).
266 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal
Expected
Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
Received
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
For SDH cards:

Enabled:
Disabled:
For ETH cards:

Enabled:
Disabled:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 267
st
Received
Virtual VC3 Configuration
268 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP Configurations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
25 GFP Configurations
25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow
an IEthernet card symbol in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Note:
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 269
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GFP Configurations
25.2 GFP Group Subview
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...
This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.
270 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
25.3 GFP Assignment
an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or
more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to
a single GFP group.
Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.
The value range depends on the port type:
Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX: 1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX: 1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX: 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Notes:
The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be
done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s
granularity).
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 271
GFP-SDH Assignment
The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user
must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header,
otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.
dropped.
This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
The IF4FE4GE and IF4FE4GEB boards do not support an overall traffic exceeding the limit of
4 Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning ETH ports to GFP groups for a traffic rate
exceeding in total the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Ethernet counts for 1 Gb/s and each Fast Ethernet port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
So, if all the 4 Giga ports are already assigned to GFP groups, no Fast port can be assigned
to other GFP groups; if at least one Fast port needs to be provisioned, three Giga ports as a
maximum can be assigned to GFP channels.
LCT shows an error message when, assigning Logical ports to GFP groups, the 4 Gb/s limit is
exceeded and the requested operation is not performed.
The IF7FE2GEL2 and IF7FE2GEL2B boards cannot support on WAN side an overall traffic
exceeding the limit of 4Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning Logical ports to GFP
channels for a overall traffic rate exceeding the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Logical port counts for1 Gb/s and each Fast Logical port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
This means that if all the three Giga Logical ports have been already assigned to GFP
groups, as a maximum ten Fast Logical ports can be assigned to other GFP channels. If more
than 10 Fast Logical ports need to be provisioned, two Giga Logical ports as a maximum can
be assigned to GFP groups.
ETH Config...
272 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VC4 Subview...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 273
25.4 SDH GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List...
(e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP
Assignment...
GFP-SDH Assignment
The VC/VC Group column allows to select a VC.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
Note: The IF7FE2GEL2 and IF7FE2GEL2B boards cannot support on WAN side an overall
traffic exceeding the limit of 4Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning Logical ports to GFP
channels for a overall traffic rate exceeding the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Logical port counts for1 Gb/s and each Fast Logical port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
This means that if all the three Giga Logical ports have been already assigned to GFP
groups, as a maximum ten Fast Logical ports can be assigned to other GFP channels. If more
than 10 Fast Logical ports need to be provisioned, two Giga Logical ports as a maximum can
be assigned to GFP groups.
274 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
ETH Config...
VC4 Subview...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 275
276 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
26 LCAS
26.1 LCAS State Configuration
> Configuration -> LCAS State...
This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.
Filter:
The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.
Selected Item:
Sink
Displays the sink state.
Source
Displays the source state.
LCAS Source Direction State
Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.
Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 277
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
active = the LCAS protocol is activated

failed = failure in the signal
278 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group
an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation
(with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...
This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the
associated TPs from the list of available TPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 279
26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...
LCAS VC3-1v Misc:
Supervision
Concatenation Type
Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps
Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.
LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set
to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.
280 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...
LCAS VC12-1v Misc:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no
influence to the alarms of the included VCs.
Concatenation Type
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is
set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 281
26.5 LCAS VC4-2v Config
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... ->
Supervision
Sets the checkbox to enable supervision.
Concatenation Type
Reserved GMPLS
Enables reserved GMPLS option.
Partial Loss of Capacity
You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have.
If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 7, then an alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.
282 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
26.6 LCAS VC4 Details Concatenation Group
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... ->
Type
Group ID
Display the Group ID involved in the concatenation.
Member TPs
This window displays the number of members in the concatenation.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 283
26.7 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).
284 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
26.8 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 285
26.9 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... ->
LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
LCAS VC3 Misc tab:
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI.
286 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Errored Blocks (B3).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
Expected
Received
LCAS State:
Sink
Source

LCAS VC3 Trail Trace tab:
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
not equal
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
Enabled:
TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 287

Disabled:
Received
288 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
26.10 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n ->
Configuration...
LCAS VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision of this VC.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 289
Errored Blocks (BIP2).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
For GFP mapping, the signal label = 13.
Expected
Received
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.
Source
Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote
station.
Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to
"Active".
To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases
the capacity in outgoing direction.
Note:
idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated
failed = failure in the VC12
LCAS VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
290 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TTI Processing
Enabled:
not equal
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
Enabled:
TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity.
Received
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 291
292 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
27 MCF General
27.1 Message Communication Functions
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...
This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message
communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.
Context Menu:
In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 293
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF General
27.2 IP over IP Config
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...
In this window, the configuration information of a IP connection is displayed.
Activate Tunnel
Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.
Address Type
The Address Type of the system that will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a
OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Source IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
Destination IP Address
Encapsulation method
The DC-RSVP IP encapsulation method of RSVP packets, which are required for out-of-band
signaling.
Tunnel TTL
The Time To Live that will be set in the tunnel, the value of the field may be changed at any
time.
294 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Tunnel Security
The defined tunnel security as fixed by the planning personnel
Tunnel TOS
The class of service is coded in the TOS field of the IP header.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 295
27.3 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...
Notes:
When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be
reestablished.
Layer 4 (Transport):
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this
packet from the opposite station.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
296 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by
the opposite station was received.
Layer 3 (NSAP):
Area Address
The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is
mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the
length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN
planning.
Note:
The NSAP address has to be unique.
System ID
The System ID is 6 Bytes long.
Note:
The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.
NSAP Selector [1.255]
The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.
Note:
The NSAP selector has to be "01"!
Layer 3 (CLNS):
CLNS Maximum Lifetime [2..255]
Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is
forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at
least 0.5 seconds.
Routing Principle
Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only
(L1).
Note:
The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be

followed by a loss of connection.
How to Configure NSAP Settings
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 297
27.4 MCF Transport Connection Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...
In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.
Remote NSAP Address
Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.
Remote T Selector
T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.
Local T Selector
T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.
Connection Type
Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming
= sent from the remote system).
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
298 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]
Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the
opposite station.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 299
27.5 MCF Transport Connection Performance
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...
This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.
300 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF CLNS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
28 MCF CLNS
28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...
This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.
Destination Areas
Address Prefix
displays the address part of the destination area.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number

contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 301
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF CLNS
Destination Systems
NSAP Address
displays the NSAP of the destination system.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number

contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.
Adjacencies
displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.
Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency)

displays the internal ID number of the linkage.
Adjacency ID
displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.
Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency)

displays the MAC address of the neighbour.
Neighbour System Type

displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.
Neighbour System IDs
Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.
302 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
28.2 MCF CLNS Performance
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...
This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.
The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.
IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload
Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.
Display Meaning
Raised The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 303
Cleared No overload
IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload
Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.
Display Meaning
Raised The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.
Cleared No overload
Assembling Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.
Congestion Discards
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.
Error Reports Received
Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.
Area Addresses Ignored
Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NE’s area, because the
maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Other PDUs Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.
304 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.
Segments Received
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.
Segments Sent
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.
Upload Dump DB...
Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.
Upload Config Parameters...
Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the

ConfigParameters.log file.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 305
306 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
29 MCF DCC
29.1 MCF DCC Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...
In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4
ports.
DCC List
The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.
Display Meaning
OSI DCC Channel OSI DCC channel name
IP DCC Device IP DCC channel name
DCCM/DCCR Port <DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>
Connection State Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free
Linkage State Possible values: Enabled / Disabled
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 307
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
New DCC Cross Connection
Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections
308 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created
and deleted here.
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: Yes or No
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).
Level 1 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 309
Default = 1
Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Default = 1
T200 Time [200...2500 ms]
Value range: 200...2500 ms
Interface Type
Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE
must be set on Network and the other one to User.
Line Code
Displays the NRZ line code.
MCF Linkage State
Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).
Note:
In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.
The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address
Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
310 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance
menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate

memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of

this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Address Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Area Mismatch
If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a

common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 311
Octets Sent
Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.
312 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 313
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
314 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode."
(Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 315
29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections
MSOH CPs in each Termination Point:
DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1)
and (8,7,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1) and (5,8,1)]

HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1)
and (7,3,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1)
and (9,9,1)]
HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1),
(6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1),
(8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
MCF DCC Configuration
316 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF Ethernet Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
30 MCF Ethernet
30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).
Click Delete to clear existing addresses.
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."
L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 317
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF Ethernet
Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.
Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Default = 1
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Default = 1
MAC Ethernet Address
Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address
is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.
The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable
Address Modify window.
318 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency

Version Skew

Max. Area Addresses Mismatch
Octets Received
Octets Sent
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 319
Frames Received
Frames Sent
320 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
another one.
Default Metric Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 321
one.
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry.
322 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.
Default Metric Type
SNPA Address
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 323
SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode.
324 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF OSI/IP Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
31 MCF OSI/IP
31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...
This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel
NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 325
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF OSI/IP
31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
Configuration:
Activate Tunnel
Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."
Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]
Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
326 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Default = 1
Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Default = 1
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.
The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP
Reachable Address Modify window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 327
31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency

Version Skew

Max. Area Address Mismatch
Octets Received
Octets Sent
328 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Frames Received
Frames Sent
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 329
31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
Add...
(zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
another one.
Default Metric Type
330 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
one.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 331
31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
(with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Default Metric Type
332 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
32 IP Settings
32.1 IP Addresses Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...
This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the
SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
Index Unique identifier of the interface.
This index must be used also for identification

of unnumbered links in OSPF configuration.
(Identifier = SNMP-index)
Interface Interface name.
Possible Interface names are :
eth0:
for Ethernet Interface
(unnumbered index 2)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 333
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IP Settings
lo:0:
for Local loopback interface
(unnumbered index 1)
dcc:
Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR.
Each device could be configured as
numbered or unnumbered interface
IP Address The local IP address of the interface.
The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in

this case the interface is not configured.
Once a local loopback address has been

defined in the SURPASS hiT 7070, it is not
possible any more to reset a configured IP
address back to 0.0.0.0. If the address 0.0.0.0
is assigned, the NE assigns the address of
lo:0 to this device. If the IP address of an
interface is equal to the address of the local
loopback interface lo:0 this interface is treated
as unnumbered interface. If the IP address is
not equal to the address of lo:0 or to the
address of any other interface this interface is
called a numbered interface. Every time that
the operator tries to disable an IP interface by
configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local
loopback IP address will be set.
+ to disable IP on the interface set this

interface to OSI only, using the "Linkage
Config" window.
For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol ->

Configuration -> MCF -> Ethernet ->
Configuration, then select OSI.
For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol ->

Configuration -> MCF -> DCC, then select a
DCC interface and press the right-hand-
mouse button, select "Configuration", then
select OSI.
Subnet Mask Subnet mask associated with the IP address

of this interface.
It defines the network that this interface

belongs to. If OSPF is enabled on this
interface the subnet mask has to be the same
as set for the connected peer interface(s).
Dest IP Address The destination IP address of the interface

referenced by the Index.
For the Ethernet interface the destination has

to be the same as the source. For DCC links
normally it is not necessary to enter any data
in this field. The destination address will be
learned via PPP protocol.
334 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 335
32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.
336 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...
This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to
configure static routes manually.
Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following
information is shown:
Column Description
Destination Destination IP address of this route.
Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to

192.168.255.255 are reserved for internal
purposes and should never be entered in this
table.
Interface Name of the local interface through which the

next hop of this route should be reached.
Metric [0..32766] Primary routing metric for this route.
Next Hop IP address of the next hop of this route.
Type Type of the route:
Direct
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 337
The destination IP address is directly

connected to the SURPASS hiT 7070 via the
interface named in the "interface" column.
Indirect
The destination IP address is reachable via
the Next Hop IP address.
Invalid
removes the route from the active routing
process.
Protocol Routing mechanism via which this route was

learned.
Mask Mask to be logically AND-ed with the

destination address, before being compared
to the value in the Destination field.
Add...
Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify
window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.
338 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 339
32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.
340 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
33 OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
33.1 OSPF Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).
OSPF Router ID
"A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. The router ID is a
read only parameter and it must be equal to the loopback address (lo:0 addess.)
Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Default value for this parameter is Enabled, but in order to work with the OSPF it is
necessary to enable each interface on the Interface config window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 341
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
Autonomous System Border Router
Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR).
Area Border Router
"A flag to note whether this router is an area border router."
Ospf Traffic Engineering
"The router's support for OSPF traffic engineering."
Ospf Protocol manager Entry
The current operational state of the OSPF Protocol Manager entity.
Maximum Delay
The maximum delay before the Routing Table is recalculated following a change to the Link
State Database. (Recalculation is delayed to reduce the frequency of recalculations of the
Routing Table). This parameter has units of milliseconds.
Pause Frequence
This value determines how regularly a Routing Calculation is paused.
342 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LSA Tab
External Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in the link-state
database.
Originated New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.
Received New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new

instantiations.
External LSA Checksum Summary
Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.
AS_External LSAs
Indicates metrics used to choose among multiple
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 343
Opaque LSA types
The router's support for Opaque LSA types. This value cannot be changed when the Entity
MIB is active and in oper state up.
AS external LSAs Refreshes Interval
The value determines the interval between refreshes of type-5 and type-11 AS-external LSAs,
and is defaulted to the OSPF standard default of 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
External Opaque LSA Count
The 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all type-11 LSAs in the external Link State Database.
Update Tab
Threshold Update Start
This parameter can be used to override the above routing calculation delay when the number
of updates to the Link State Database reaches a threshold value.
Threshold Update Restart
This parameter can be used to interrupt a full routing calculation when the number of pending
updates to the Link State Database has reached a threshold value.
Threshold Incremental Update
This parameter can be used to optimize the performance of the Routing Calculator in the
situation where updates that are pending to the Link State Database solely concern inter-area
or AS-external routes.
344 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Threshold Incremental SPF Update
This parameter is used to configure the threshold value for which recalculation by multiple
incremental SPF updates is no longer quicker than a single full recalculation.
Number Update Pending
The number of updates that are pending addition to the Link State Database.
Number Update Merged
The number of updates that have been merged into the Link State Database since the last
routing calculation.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 345
33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.
Column Description
Area Unique identifier of an area.
LSA Import Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State

Advertisements). Used to configure stub
areas.
Indicates whether an area is a Stub area,

NSSA, or standard area. Type-5 AS-External
LSAs and Type-11 Opaque LSAs are not
imported into Stub Areas or NSSAs. NSSAs
import AS-External data as Type-7 LSAs.
This value cannot be changed when the area
MIB is active and has oper_state up
SPF Runs The number of times that the intra-area route

table has been calculated using this area's
link state database.
Link State This is an information field: displays the

Advertisement (LSA) number of Link State Advertisements.
LSA Checksum This is an information field: displays the sum
346 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Summary of the LSA link-state checksums contained in

the link-state database of this area.
Area Summary Control of the import of summary LSAs into

stub areas.
Reachable Area Border The total number of area border routers

Routers reachable within this area.
Reachable The total number of Autonomous System

Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area.
Border Routers
Administrative Status The desired administrative state of this OSPF

area.
Operational Status The current operational state of this OSPF

area.
Transit Capability This parameter indicates whether the area

can carry data traffic that neither originates
nor terminates in the area itself.
LSA Refreshes Interval Self-originated LSAs are periodically

reflooded into the routing domain, to add to
the robustness of the OSPF protocol.
Router LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-1 in this

area's Link State Database.
Network LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-2 in this

Summary LSA Count The 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all LSAs

with LS type-2 in this area's Link State
Database.
AS Summary LSA The number of LSAs with LS type-4 in this

Count area's Link State Database.
NSSA LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-7 in this

Area Opaque LSA The number of LSAs with LS type-7 in this

Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.
Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 347
33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
348 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Column Description

areas.
Indicates whether an area is a Stub area,

NSSA, or standard area. Type-5 AS-External
LSAs and Type-11 Opaque LSAs are not
imported into Stub Areas or NSSAs. NSSAs
import AS-External data as Type-7 LSAs.
This value cannot be changed when the area
MIB is active and has oper_state up




stub areas.
If it is noAreaSummary, the router will neither

originate nor propagate summary LSAs into
the stub or NSSA area. It will rely entirely on
its default route.
Reachable Area Border The total number of area border routers

Routers reachable within this area.
Reachable The total number of Autonomous System

Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area.
Border Routers
Administrative Status The desired administrative state of this OSPF

area.
Operational Status The current operational state of this OSPF

area.
Transit Capability This parameter indicates whether the area

can carry data traffic that neither originates
nor terminates in the area itself.
LSA Refreshes Interval Self-originated LSAs are periodically

the robustness of the OSPF protocol.
Router LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-1 in this

A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 349
Network LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-2 in this

Summary LSA Count The 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all LSAs

with LS type-2 in this area's Link State
Database.
AS Summary LSA The number of LSAs with LS type-4 in this

NSSA LSA Count The number of LSAs with LS type-7 in this

Area Opaque LSA The number of LSAs with LS type-7 in this

Administrative Status "The desired administrative state of this OSPF

area."
350 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.4 OSPF Areas Entry Add
Modify...
This window allows to add an entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
Column Description
Administrative The desired administrative state of this OSPF area.

Status
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 351
33.5 OSPF Area Metric Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.
Column Description
Area The 32 bit identifier for the Stub Area. On

creation, this can be derived from the
instance.
Metric Value [0..65535] Metric on this interface.
Metric Type This variable displays the type of metric

advertised as a default route.
352 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.6 OSPF Area Metric Entry Add
Column Description
Area The 32 bit identifier for the Stub Area. On creation, this can
be derived from the instance.
Metric Value Metric on this interface.

[0..65535]
Metric Type This variable displays the type of metric advertised as a

default route.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 353
33.7 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .
Note :
It is only possible to create an entry when the OSPF already exists.
The operator must create two entries:
1. First the Operator must create an entry in AreaTable:
2. Then the Operator can create an entry in AreaAggregateTable:
Column Description
Area Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be

found.
LSDB Type Type of the Area Aggregate.
The type of the Address Aggregate. This field

specifies the Lsdb type that this Address
354 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Aggregate applies to.
Net Address The IP address of the network or sub-network

indicated by the range.
Net Mask The sub-network mask that pertains to the

network or sub-network.
Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges

either trigger the advertisement of the
indicated aggregate (advertise matching),
or result in the sub-network not being
advertised at all outside the area.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.
Delete
Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 355
33.8 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add
Aggregates... -> Add..
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.
Note :
It is only possible to create an entry when the OSPF already exists.
The operator must create two entries:
1. First the Operator must create an entry in AreaTable:
2. Then the Operator can create an entry in AreaAggregateTable:
Column Description

found.


356 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges either

trigger the advertisement of the indicated
aggregate (advertise matching), or result in
the sub-network not being advertised at all
outside the area.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 357
33.9 OSPF Interfaces Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration
The parameters in the table columns and their meaning are reported here below:
IP Address
IP address of this OSPF interface.
Area
Unique identifier of the area to which the interface connects.
State
OSPF interface state. The possible types are the following:
For Ethernet Interface:
- Designated Router,
- Backup Designated Router
- Other Designated Router
For DCC Interfaces,
- Point to Point (PtP)
Administrative State
358 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled / Disabled).
Router Priority [0..255]
Priority of this interface. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry.
Operational status
The current operational state of this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535 s]
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout [1..65535 s]
Timeout interval. The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen
before it's neighbors declare the router down.
Interface
The textual name of the interface.
Index
Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.
Remote port
For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index assigned to this link by the
remote peer.
PUSH-BUTTONS IN THE WINDOW:
Add...
Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window
Delete
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 359
33.10 OSPF Interface Entry Modify
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -
> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.
IP Address
Area
Unique identifier of the area to which the interface connects.
State
OSPF interface state. The possible types are the following:
360 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
- Designated Router,
- Backup Designated Router
- Other Designated Router
For DCC Interfaces,
- Point to Point (PtP)
Administrative State
Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled / Disabled).
Router Priority [0..255]
Priority of this interface. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry.
Operational status
The current operational state of this interface.
Timeout [1..65535 s]
Timeout interval. The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen
before it's neighbors declare the router down.
Interface
Index
Remote port
For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index assigned to this link by the
remote peer.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 361
OSPF Interface Entry Modify - TAB Other
Type
The OSPF interface type.
Transit delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
Retransmission interval
The number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies
belonging to this interface.
Designated router
The IP Address of the Designated Router
Events
The number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred
Password type
The authentication type specified for an interface. Additional authentication types may be
assigned locally.
Password
The cleartext password used as an OSPF Authentication key when simplePassword security
is enabled.
362 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
If the key length is shorter than 8 octets, the agent will left adjust and zero fill to 8 octets.
Poll interval
The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non-
broadcast multi-access neighbor
Local link State advertisements
The total number of link-local link state advertisements in this interface's link-local link state
database.
Administartive Groups
This field specifies administrative group membership for this interface, in terms of a bit mask.
Transmit Timer delay
The time this interface will delay a LSU packet, in order to add more LSAs to the packet
before sending.
Maximum Packet size
Maximum transfer unit (MTU) for the network interface.
This is the maximum packet size in bytes for packets sent over the network interface.
Lsa refreshs interval
Self-originated LSAs are periodically reflooded into the routing domain, to add to the
robustness of the OSPF protocol. This value determines the interval between refreshes of
LSAs that are only flooded over this interface (type-9 opaque LSAs) and is defaulted to the
OSPF standard default of 1800 seconds (30 minutes)
QoS Support
Defines whether Traffic Engineering LSAs can be originated for this interface.
TE LSA Flooding
Used to enable TE LSA flooding across this interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 363
33.11 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add
> Add...
Numbered interface
Enable/disable the numbered interface
Interface Index
364 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
For the purpose of easing the instancing of addressed and address less interfaces; this
variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and the corresponding value of if
Index for interfaces having no IP Address
Index
IP Address
Administrative Status
The desired administrative state of this OSPF area.
Area
Unique identifier of an area.A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area.
Type
The OSPF interface type.
Router Priority
The priority of this interface. Used in multi-access networks, this field is used in the
designated router election algorithm. The value 0 signifies that the router is not eligible to
become the designated router on thisparticular network. .
Transit delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this
interface
Retransmission interval
The number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies

belonging to this interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database description
and link-state request packets.
Hello Interval
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface
Timeout
Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password type
The authentication type specified for an interface. Additional authentication types may be
assigned locally.
Password
The cleartext password used as an OSPF Authentication key when simplePassword security
is enabled. If the key length is shorter than 8 octets, the agent will left adjust and zero fill to 8
octets.
Poll interval
The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non-
broadcast multi-access neighbor
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 365
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry. The value of the mask is an IP
address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0.
Authentic data
Authentication user data for interface level authentication.
This data is passed opaquely to the DC authentication interface where it can be used to assist
with authentication decisions.
366 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.12 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.
Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this

entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 367
33.13 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration.
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.
Column Description
Area Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.
Virtual Neighbour Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.
State OSPF virtual interface state.
Events Number of state changes or error events on

this Virtual Link.
Transit Delay [0..3600 Estimated number of seconds it takes to

s] transmit a link-state update packet over this
interface.
Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state

[0..3600 s] advertisement retransmissions, for
368 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
adjacencies belonging to this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535 Number of seconds between the Hello

s] packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to

[1.. 2147483647 s] be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password Type Type of the password.
Password Password entry.
Local Link State The total number of link-local link state

Advertisements advertisements in this interface's link-local link
state database.
Admin Status The desired administrative state of this virtual

interface
Operational Status The current operational state of this virtual

interface.
Administrative Groups This field specifies administrative group

membership for this interface, in terms of a bit
mask.
Transmit Timer delay The time this interface will delay a LSU
packet, in order to add more LSAs to the
packet before sending.
Maximum Packet Size Maximum transfer unit (MTU) for the network
interface.
Passive Indicates whether this interface is a passive

interface.
LSA Refresh Interval Self-originated LSAs are periodically

the robustness of the OSPF protocol. This
value determines the interval between
refreshes of LSAs in this area, and is
defaulted to the OSPF standard default of
1800 seconds.
TE LSA Flooding Used to enable TE LSA flooding across this

interface. This allows the TE data network to
be partitioned separately from the underlying
OSPF control plane network.
Authentic Data Authentication user data for interface level

authentication.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.
Modify
Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry modify window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 369
Note:
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Delete
Note:
370 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.14 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Modify
Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to modify a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
Area
Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.
Virtual Neighbour
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 371
Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.
Transmit timer delay
The time this interface will delay a LSU packet, in order to add more LSAs to the packet
before sending.
Transit delay
Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet over this
interface.
Maximum Packet Size
Maximum transfer unit (MTU) for the network interface.
Passive
Indicates whether this interface is a passive interface.
Interface
LSA Refresh Interval
Self-originated LSAs are periodically reflooded into the routing domain, to add to the
robustness of the OSPF protocol.
TE LSA Flooding
Used to enable TE LSA flooding across this interface.
Retransmission Interval [0..3600 s]
Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies

belonging to this interface.
Timeout [1.. 2147483647 s]
Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password Type
Type of the password.
Password
Password entry.
Admin Status
The desired administrative state of this virtual interface.
Authentic Data
Authentication user data for interface level authentication.
372 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.15 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
Column Description

interface.

A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 373

be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
[1.. 2147483647 s]
Admin Status The desired administrative state of this virtual

interface
Authentic Data Authentication user data for interface level

authentication.
374 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.16 OSPF Neighbours Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 375
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this neighbour.
Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.
On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding

value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.
Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the

Autonomous System.
LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour

(OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this

Routing neighbor (OFF/ON).
Neighbour Priority Priority of this neighbour in the designated

[0..255] router selection algorithm.
State State of the relationship with this neighbour.
Events Number of times this neighbour relationship

has changed state, or an error has occurred.
Admin Status The desired administrative state of this

neighbour
Operational Status The current operational state of this

neighbour.
LSA Requests The number of LSAs we have requested from

this neighbour for which we are still awaiting a
response.
IP Address Interface The IP address of the interface used for this

neighbour.
Note, this field cannot be changed while the

row is active (Admin Status UP).
376 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.17 OSPF Neighbours Entry Details
IP Address
IP address of this neighbour.
Index
On an interface having an IP address: zero.
On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.
Neighbour Router ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 377
Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the Autonomous System.
LSA Import
LSA import state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Routing
Type-of-Service Routing state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).
Neighbour Priority [0..255]
Priority of this neighbour in the designated router selection algorithm.
State
State of the relationship with this neighbour.
Events
Number of times this neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.
Retransmission Queue Length
The current length of the retransmission queue.
Hello Suppressed
Indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor.
Admin status
The desired administrative state of this neighbour.
Operational Status
The current operational state of this neighbour.
LSA Requests
The number of LSAs we have requested from this neighbour for which we are still awaiting a
response.
378 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.18 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information
Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours.
Note:
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.
Column Description
Area Transit area identifier.
IP Address IP address of this virtual neighbour.
Virtual Neighbour Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour

Router ID router.
LSA Import LSA import state with this virtual neighbour

(OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual

Routing neighbour (OFF/ON).
State State of the relationship with this virtual

neighbour.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 379
Events Number of times this virtual neighbour

relationship has changed state, or an error
has occurred.
Retransmission Queue Current length of the retransmission queue.

Length
Hello Suppressed Indicator whether Hellos are being

suppressed to the neighbour.

response.
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.
380 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.19 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details
Neighbours... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 381
Column Description

Router ID router.

(OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual


neighbour.

has occurred.

Length


response.
Details...
Details window.
Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.
382 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.20 OSPF LSDB Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...
This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.
Column Description
Area Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was

received.
Type Type of the Link State Advertisement.
Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.
LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating router in the

Autonomous System.
Sequence Sequence number.
Age [s] Age of the link state advertisement in

seconds.
Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the

advertisement, excepting the age field.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 383
Link State Number of Link State Advertisements.

Advertisement (LSA)
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.
384 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.21 OSPF LSDB Entry Details
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 385
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.
Column Description

received.

Autonomous System.

seconds.


Advertisement (LSA)
386 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.22 OSPF External LSDB Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 387
Column Description
Type Type of the external Link State Advertisement.
Ext LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating external

router.
Age [s] Age of the external link state advertisement in

seconds.

advertisement, excepting the Age field.
Ext Link State Number of external Link State

Advertisement Advertisements.
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window
388 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
33.23 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
-> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.
Column Description

router.

seconds.


A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 389
33.24 Switching Info
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Switching
Encoding type
The type of encoding used on this interface.
Max LSP Bandwidth
The MAX LSP bandwidth on this interface, at the selected priority level, in IEEE floating point
format, used by CSPF to calculate constrained routes. The units are bytes per second.
Last Max LSP Bandwidth
The last advertised MAX LSP Bandwidth at the selected priority level for this interface.
Minimum LSP Bandwidth
This parameter determines the minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
Last Minimum LSP Bandwidth
The last advertised minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
MTU Size
This field reports the Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
Last MTU Size
The last advertised Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
Sonet SDH Support
390 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The SONET or SDH supported on this interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 391
33.25 Switching Entry Details
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Switching….
->Details
Max LSP Bandwidth
The MAX LSP bandwidth on this interface, at the selected priority level, in IEEE floating point
format, used by CSPF to calculate constrained routes. The units are bytes per second.
Last Max LSP Bandwidth
The last advertised MAX LSP Bandwidth at the selected priority level for this interface.
Minimum LSP Bandwidth
This parameter determines the minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
Last Minimum LSP Bandwidth
The last advertised minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
392 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Encoding type
The type of encoding used on this interface.
MTU Size
This field reports the Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
Last MTU Size
The last advertised Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
Sonet SDH Support
The SONET or SDH supported on this interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 393
33.26 Performance
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) ->Performance
The stack shall keep counters for the:
Total number of packets sent by the stack in the last 15min
Total number of bytes sent by the stack in the last 15min
Total number of packets sent by the stack in the last 24h
Total number of bytes sent by the stack in the last 24h
In addition, the stack should store the:
Starting time of the 15 minutes measurement period
Starting time of the 24 hours measurement period.
394 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34 OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
34.1 OSPF Configuration
This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).
OSPF Router ID
Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is
the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.
Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at
least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 395
Autonomous System Border Router
Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs
propagate default routes only when these are entered.
Area Border Router
Indication whether this router is an area border router.
Information Fields:
External Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently
stored in the link-state database.
Originated New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.
Received New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new

instantiations.
External LSA Checksum Summary
Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.
396 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.2 OSPF Areas Configuration
This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.
Column Description

areas.




stub areas.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 397
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.
Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.
398 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify
Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 399
34.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration
400 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration
Aggregates...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
Column Description

found.


Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges

either trigger the advertisement of the
indicated aggregate (advertise matching),
or result in the sub-network not being
advertised at all outside the area.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 401
Add...
Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.
Delete
Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.
402 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add
Aggregates... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 403
34.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration
Column Description
Index Unique identifier of this interface.

This is the index defined in the IP Address
Table.
IP Address IP address of this interface.
State OSPF interface state: possible types are

Designated Router,
Backup Designated Router
Other Designated Router
For DCC Interfaces,

Point to Point (PtP)
Events Number of times this OSPF interface has

changed its state, or an error has occurred.
Administrative State Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled /

Disabled).
404 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Area Unique identifier of the area to which the

interface connects.
Type OSPF interface type:
Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces).

Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)
The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in

this table.
Designated Router IP address of the designated router in the

LAN, if applicable.
Backup Designated IP address of the backup designated router in

Router the LAN, if applicable.
Router Priority [0..255] Priority of this interface for becoming

Designated Router.
Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming
Designated Router.
Transit Delay [0..3600 Estimated number of seconds to transmit a

s] link-state update packet over this interface.


Timeout [1..65535 s] Timeout interval.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window
Delete
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 405
34.8 OSPF Entry Add
> Add...
Notes:
To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP
Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP
Address field is grayed out.
The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if
OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be
configured to the default values:
Area Backbone Area
Router Priority 1
406 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Transit Delay 1
Retransmission Interval 5
Hello Interval 10
Timeout 40
Password none
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 407
34.9 OSPF Interface metric Configuration
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.
Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this

entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).
408 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration
Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
Note:
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.
Column Description
State OSPF virtual interface state.
Events Number of state changes or error events on

this Virtual Link.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 409

interface.



[1.. 2147483647 s] be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Add...
Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.

Note:
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Delete
Note:
410 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 411
34.12 OSPF Neighbours Information
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this neighbour.
Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.
On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding

value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.
Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the

Autonomous System.
LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour

(OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this

Neighbour Priority Priority of this neighbour in the designated

[0..255] router selection algorithm.
State State of the relationship with this neighbour.
412 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Events Number of times this neighbour relationship

has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Length
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 413
34.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information
Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours
Note:
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.
Column Description

Router ID router.

(OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual
Type-of-Service neighbour (OFF/ON).
Routing

neighbour.
414 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619

has occurred.

Length

Details...
Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 415
34.14 OSPF Virtual neighbours Entry Details
Neighbours... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.
Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.
416 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.15 OSPF LSDB Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...
This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.
Column Description

received.

Autonomous System.

seconds.


Advertisement (LSA)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 417
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.
418 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
34.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 419
34.17 OSPF External LSDB Information
This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.
Column Description

router.

seconds.


420 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 421
34.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
-> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.
422 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TCP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
35 TCP Settings
35.1 TCP Connections Information
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...
This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070
and all the currently established TCP connections.
There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
State State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening

mode or a TCP connection is established.
Local Address Local IP address for this TCP connection.
Local Port Local port number for this TCP connection.
Remote Address Remote IP address for this TCP connection.
Remote Port Remote port number for this TCP connection.
Details...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 423
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) TCP Settings
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details
window.
Notes:
All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used
internally.
The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also
be displayed via the
Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration
-> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....
Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with
"54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.
424 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TCP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
35.2 TCP Connections Entry Details
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info
list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 425
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) TCP Settings
426 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
36 Data
36.1 Subrack Data
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack
symbol -> Subrack Data...
Customer Specific tab:
In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack.
Value range: 0...128 characters
Vendor Specific tab:
The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 427
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
36.2 ASIC Data Information
> Information -> ASIC Data...
This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.
428 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
36.3 Copy Data
This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card
or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the
port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic
symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or
more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object
configurations within the same card
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).
Copy Items
This area allows to select the configuration types to be copied:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 429
Alarm configurations
Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)
Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.
Copy Card Data
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
430 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
36.4 Copy Card Data
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
(except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...
This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty
equivalent slots.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.
Copy Data
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 431
36.5 DB Management Configuration
> Config DB Management...
In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.
The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in
a non-volatile memory.
You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You
can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a
card/software change or failure.
NE State
The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.
Active Config DB:
Configuration ID
Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.
Config DB Action
Possible Settings:
432 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
NE State Config DB Action
Active no
Idle no
Set to Default Config DB
Set to Previous Config DB
How to Download VCDB Files
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 433
36.6 DB Download Dialog
> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened
window, select the relevant file) -> Open.
This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.
By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.
Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.
How to Download VCDB Files
434 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
36.7 DB Upload Dialog
> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) ->
Save.
This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.
By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.
Note:
In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.
How to Upload VCDB Files
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 435
36.8 NE Logs Information
> Logs... -> NE Logs...
Configuration Log tab:
The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.
Click the column header to sort the column.
If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute
window.
Historical Event Log tab:
The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical
event log.
Click the column header to sort the column.
Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar
or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.
436 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
36.9 Log Records Attribute
> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object) -
> Show Details...
This window displays details of the selected object.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 437
438 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
37 Performance
37.1 Ethernet Packet Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 439
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval
Current 15min Corresponding entries
Current 24h Corresponding entries
Tx Incoming ETH traffic
Rx Outgoing ETH traffic
TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.
Lost Frames Queue Overflow Rx

If the flow control is disabled and the input traffic exceeds the VC capacity or the value of the
admission control, there will be lost frames. So the corrupt frames are counted.
Multicast Frames
Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.
Bad Frames CrC Error Rx

Corrupted frames which enter the port.
Dropped Frames Tx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong.
Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.
Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes)
Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not
assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.
Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.
Previous 15 min tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
440 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals
are also contained in the list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 441
37.2 AU4 PJE Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Performance -> AU4 PJE...
This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h
performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Current
The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval
Time Time of the current interval
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)
442 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
-PJE The negative pointer actions are counted
+PJE The positive pointer actions are counted
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The
last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The
last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min
intervals are also contained in the list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 443
37.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance
of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...
Current tab:
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
444 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Enable TCA Monitoring
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
Avg. BER Average BER of the current interval
Max. BER Maximal BER within the current interval
Available Time Time within the current interval
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower
threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 445
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
446 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.4 MSTTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...
Current tab:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 447
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
Note:
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more

BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
448 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 449
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
450 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.5 MSTTP Far End Performance
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...
Current tab:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 451
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
452 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 453
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
454 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.6 RSTTP Near End Performance
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...
Current tab:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 455
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
456 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 457
Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
458 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.7 VCCTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Near End...
The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.
Current tab:
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 459
intervals
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after
10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
460 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 461
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
462 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.8 VCCTP Far End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Far End...
The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.
Current tab:
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 463
intervals.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

464 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 465
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
466 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.9 VCTTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a IF4FE4GEB symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu
of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...
Current tab:
Note:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 467
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after
10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
468 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 469
Previous 24 h
transport function.
Note:
470 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.10 VCTTP Far End Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a IF4FE4GEB symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu
of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End
Current tab:
Note:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 471
Note:
Current
UAS detection.
Display Meaning

472 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Monitoring enabled
fields.
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Previous 24 h
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 473
transport function.
Note:
474 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.11 VC12 Near End Performance
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -
> VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...
Current tab:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 475
Note:
Current
UAS detection:
Display Meaning

Monitoring enabled
fields.
476 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Previous 24 h
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 477
Note:
478 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.12 VC12 Far End Performance
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -
> VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...
Current tab:
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 479
Note:
Current
UAS detection:
Display Meaning

number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
Monitoring enabled
fields.
480 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
TCA 24 h
TCA UAT
Previous 15 min
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Previous 24 h
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 481
Note:
482 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
37.13 GFP Frames Performance
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP
Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...
Current tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 483
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval
Time Time of the current interval
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)
Dropped Frames Tx Discarded downstream frames due to queue overflow. (i.e.

tagged ethernet downstream on gigabit uplink exceeding
its assigned VC capacity)
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.
Dropped Frames Rx Transferred downstream ethernet frames from gigabit

uplink towards assigned downlink VC.
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.
Average Throughput Rx Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of

[bytes/s] ethernet frames in the passed measuring interval.
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are
also contained in the list.
484 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
38 GMPLS
38.1 GMPLS Config

RSVP tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Configuration ...
This window allows to configure the GMPLS Interface .
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 485
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
AS Number [0..65535]
The number identifying the autonomous system (AS) which this node belongs to.
Sender TTL [0..255]
The TTL set on messages originating at this node. A value of 0 indicates this number is
determined by other means.
Min Timer Period [0..2147483647 ms]
The minimum granularity to allow an internal timer to be set in the RSVP product code.
Refresh Interval [0..2147483647 ms]
This RSVP (ReSerVation Protocol) value, R, which is used to set the average interval
between refresh path and resv messages.
Refresh Multiple [1..2147483647]
The RSVP value, K, which is the number of unresponded Path or Resv refresh attempts
which must be made, spaced by the refresh interval before the state is deemed to have timed
out.
Wait Restore Timer [1..2147483647]
Wait-to-restore timer value for this call. The timer is started when a defect condition is cleared
and runs for the configured time. On expiry, reversion switching is initiated if the defect
condition is still cleared.
LSP Setup Priority [0..7]
The setup priority to apply to LSPs which are not signalling this parameter. 0 represents the
highest priority, 7 the lowest.
LSP Holding Priority [0..7]
The holding priority to apply to LSPs which are not signalling this parameter. 0 represents the
highest priority, 7 the lowest.
Admin Status
The desired administrative state of the RSVP entity.
Oper Status
The current operational state of this instance of RSVP.
Use Hop By Hop
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing scheme for PATH and
PATH-TEAR messages it sends.
Use Notify
A flag to indicate that RSVP should attempt to insert a Notify Request object in all Path
requests that is sends as ingress and all Resv requests that it sends as egress. The precise
behavior is modified by a user exit called by the RSVP code.
486 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Notify RR Decay [0..100]
The percentage increase in the rapid retransmission interval for each consecutive
unacknowledged RSVP Notify message. A value of 0 indicates a constant retransmission
rate.
Notify RR Interval [1..2147483647 ms]
The interval in milliseconds before a Notify message is first resent if no acknowledgement is

received.
Notify RR Limit [0..2147483647]
The maximum number of times a Notify message is resent if no acknowledgement is

received.
Allow Encapsulation
A flag to indicate that RSVP should support the use of IP encapsulation of RSVP packets,
which are required for out-of-band signaling.
Init Path RR Decay [0..100]
unacknowledged RSVP Initial Path message.
Init Path RR Interval [1..2147483647]
The rapid retransmission interval in milliseconds before an Initial Path message is first resent
if no acknowledgement is received.
Init Path RR Limit [0..2147483647]
The maximum number of times an Initial Path message is resent if no acknowledgement is

received.
UNI
A flag to indicate whether the local node supports UNI signaling messages.
Note: in the current LCT version this is not configurable
Restart Capable
A flag to indicate whether the local node should advertise itself as restart capable. This should
be set to true if fault-tolerance is enabled in GMPLS or if the node supports recovery
procedures.
Restart Time [1..4294967295 ms]
The time in milliseconds that the local node takes to restart RSVP-TE and the communication
channel used for RSVP communication. This is advertised to neighbours in the Restart_Cap
object in Hello messages.
Refresh Slew
The numerator and the denominator of the fraction, SlewMax, which is the maximum
allowable increase in the refresh interval, R, to prevent state timeout while changing R. R is
increased by this fraction until it reaches the new desired value.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 487
Recovery Time [0..4294967295 ms]
The period of time in milliseconds that the local node would like neighbors to take to
resyncronize RSVP and GMPLS forwarding information after the re-establishment of Hello
connectivity. This is advertised to neighbours in the Restart_Cap object in Hello messages.
Min Peer Restart [0..2147483647]
The mininum period of time in milliseconds that RSVP should wait for a restart capable
neighbor to regain Hello connectivity before invoking procedures related to communication
loss.
Graceful Deletion Timeout [1..2147483647]
The time in milliseconds that GMPLS will wait for graceful deletion to complete before the
forced deletion procedure is used instead.
Egress Deletion Behavior
Specifies the action that an egress node should take in the graceful deletion procedure on
receipt of a Path message containing an Admin Status object with the D and R bits set.
NNI
A flag to indicate whether the local node supports NNI signaling messages.
Label Set Style
Specifies the style of LABEL_SET object that should be used.
Label Set Oper Status
The current operational state of Label Set style:
- excludeLabelHeader: the LABEL_SET object contains concatenated LABEL values without

the object headers.
- includeLabelHeader: the LABEL_SET object contains concatenated LABEL objects with the
object headers.
- goingToExclude: the Label Set Style is being changed from includeLabelHeader to

excludeLabelHeader.
- goingToInclude: the Label Set Style is being changed from excludeLabelHeader to

includeLabelHeader.
Label Set Trap
This object is used to enable traps for the Label Set style oper_status object.
Label Set Change Action
Specifies the action to take when the value of RsvpProductLabelSetStyle is changed:
- leaveLSPs: All nodes should suppress refreshes and switch to the new format while
refreshes are suppressed.
- tearLSPs: Any LSPs using label sets will be deleted before switching all nodes to the new
format, and any new LSPs using label sets will be dropped/rejected until theswitch is
complete.
Extended Protection Admin Status
The desired operational state of support for the extended PROTECTION object.
488 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Error Action
This field is used by RSVP to determine whether it should take any special action following
certain types of local errors. Each bit of this flags field corresponds to an error and a
corresponding action.
Behavior Flags
Specifies some detailed aspects of the behavior of RSVP.
Path State Removed Set
This field is used by RSVP to determine whether it should set the Path State Removed flag on
a PathErr (and therefore remove corresponding state and generate a PathTear). Each bit of
this flags field corresponds to a situation where DC-RSVP may generate a PathErr.
DC-RSVP has received a PathErr message with the Path State Removed flag set.
Path State Removed Unset
DC-RSVP has received a PathErr message with the Path State Removed flag unset.
LDB Common RCVD
DC-RSVP has received a negative response to an ATG_LDB_RESERVE_LSP_XC or

ATG_LDB_CONNECT_LSP_XC message.
LDB Preempted
DC-RSVP has received a Preemption message from Label Manager.
Routing Error
DC-RSVP has received a Negative response to an ATG_IPR_QUERY_ROUTE message.
Invalid Path Msg
DC-RSVP has received an invalid Path message.
Session Expired
A session in DC-RSVP has expired.
Unable To Repair Route
A route has been removed and DC-RSVP is unable to start local repair.
Unable To Repair Interface
An interface has been removed and DC-RSVP is unable start local repair.
Reached Retry Limit
An initial Path Message has reached its retry limit.
Unable To Refresh
DC-RSVP has been unable to refresh an LSP.
Resv Err Turn Around
DC-RSVP has received a ResvErr at the Egress node containing a REROUTING object and
this is to be turned round into a PathErr.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 489
Incoming Interface Down
The incoming MPLS data interface for an LSP has been deactivated.
Outgoing Interface Down
The outgoing MPLS data interface for an LSP has been deactivated.
Note: Some of the RSVP parameters can also be configured per interface. In this case, the
parameter configured per interface overwrites the parameter value configured in this window.
490 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Config - TE tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Configuration
Entity Admin Status
The desired administrative state of the DC-TPM entity.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 491
Entity Oper Status
The current operational state of the DC-TPM entity.
Tunnel Retry Interval [0..65535 ms]
The persistent tunnel retry interval. This is the interval between the first failure of a persistent
tunnel and the first attempt to re-establish the tunnel. A value of 0 indicates retrying is not
supported.
Tunnel Retry Decay Rate [0..100]
The persistent tunnel decay rate. This is a percentage.
Thus a value of 10 increases the retry interval by ten per cent of the previous value. A value
of 0 indicates a constant retry rate.
Tunnel Retry Max [-1..255]
The maximum number of retry attempts that will be made before a persistent tunnel is demed
inoperable. Once in this state, a management agent should set mplsTunnelAdminStatus to
'up' to attempt to reestablish the tunnel.
A value of -1 indicates infinite retry, so a persistent tunnel will continue to be retried until it is
successfully established.
Allow Graceful Deletion
A boolean indicating whether DC-TPM should allow tunnels to be deleted using the graceful
deletion procedure.
To be configured by Siemens staff only.
Show Transit Tunnels
A flag to indicate whether RSVP should inform DC-TPM about LSPs for which this node is
transit.
To be configured by Siemens staff only.
Support CHop Table
A flag to indicate whether DC-TPM should support calculation of hops for the
mplsTunnelCHopTable or for automatically provisioned e2e protecting LSPs.
Extended Protection Support Admin Status
The desired operational state of support for the extended PROTECTION object.
UNI
Flags field indicating whether a RESV_CONFIRM object should be included in RSVP Resv
messages.
MPLS
Flags field indicating whether a RESV_CONFIRM object should be included in RSVP Resv
messages.
492 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Config - CMS tab
Operational Status
The stack operational status.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 493
QST Dry Delay
The value of the QST Dry Configuration Delays, in units of milliseconds.
QST Dry Delay should be visible for Siemens staff only.
Monitoring Type
Error Log
The monitoring type to be used for all calls on the NE Configuration Error Log as reported.
494 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Config - Tracing tab
IPS Tracing File Size (Kbyte)
IPS trace file size limit.
PD Tracing File Size (Kbyte)
PD trace file size limit.
Note : Configurable by Siemens Service staff only
IPS Tracing
Choose to enable or disable the IPS tracing.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 495
38.2 Interface Configuration
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Configuration ...
This window describes the GMPLS traffic engineering interface attributes for Surpass hiT
network elements
Local Endpoint ID
Configurable by Siemens Service staff only - local endpoint ID is always 0.0.0.0
For a DDRP level link, this field can be used to configure the Routing Controller ID of the local
endpoint of a link when this router is not the local endpoint.
Local Index
Network interface index in the IF-MIB.
Name
The interface name.
Type
The interface type.
Port Classifier
Port classifier value for this interface.
496 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Status
The status of the interface card hosting this interface.
Card Type
The type of interface card hosting this interface.
The desired registration state of the network interface.
Operational Status
The operational status of the network interface indicating the registration status with the
GMPLS Controller.
TE Link
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Metric [1..65535]
The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations.
SRLG Ids
This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. An SRLG is identified with a 32-bit number
that is unique within an IGP domain. Zero is a valid SRLG number.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 497
38.3 Interface Management

General tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Interfaces…
This window describes the GMPLS traffic management information applicable to a particular
network interface.
Local endpoint id
Configurable by Siemens Service staff only - local endpoint ID is always 0.0.0.0.
Local Index
Network interface index in the IF-MIB .
498 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Name
The interface name.
Type
The interface type.
Remote Router ID
For a point to point interface, this specifies the IPv4 router ID of the remote peer.
Remote Index
Remote interface index. For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index
assigned to this link by the remote peer, or for a DDRP level link, the remote endpoint node.
Port Classifier
INNI if it is part of GMPLS domain. Non GMPLS if it is a client interface.
Card Type
The interface card type.
Card Status
The interface card status
Operational status
The interface real status.
TE Link
MPLS Tunnel
GMPLS interface flags.
Loop Back
Point to Point
Broadcast
Multicast
Unum
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 499
Nbma
Bundle
Component
Inter Domain
500 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TE link tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> .....
network interface
Metric [0..65535]
Unprotected
Always unprotected , read only , not configurable by user.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 501
Dedicated 1+1
Read only , not configurable by user.
SRLG ID
that is unique within an IGP domain.
Index
502 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MPLS tab
network interface
Hello Period [0..4294967295 ms]
Default period in milliseconds between sending Hello messages to all neighbors on this
interface. If this is set to 0, no Hello messages are sent by this interface.
Hello Decay [0..4294967295]
Percentage increase in hello period after each Hello message sent when the hello session
with the neighbor has timed out.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 503
Hello Tolerance [0..4294967295]
Number of hello periods which may pass without receiving a successful Hello message from a
partner before the Hello session times out.
Hello Persist [0..4294967295]
Number of hello periods which may pass after the Hello session times out before Hello
messages cease.
Refresh Interval [-1..2147483647 ms]
The average interval, in milliseconds, between Path and Resv refresh messages for LSPs
which use this interface for RSVP-signalled data. A value of 0 indicates that the globally
configured value in the RSVP MIB table is used for this interface.
Refresh Multiple [0..2147483647]
The RSVP value, K, which is the number of unresponded Path or Resv refresh attempts
which must be made, spaced by the refresh interval before the state is deemed to have timed
out.
Refresh Slew
The numerator / denominator of the fraction, SlewMax, which is the maximum allowable
increase in the refresh interval, R, to prevent state timeout while changing R. R is increased
by this fraction until it reaches the new desired value.
Blockade Multiple [0..2147483647]
The RSVP value, Kb, which is the number of refresh timeout periods after which blockade
state is deleted.
Summary Refresh Interval [0..2147483647 ms]
The average interval, in milliseconds, between Summary refresh messages for LSPs which
use this interface for RSVP-signalled data.
Use Hop By Hop
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing.
Use Message Ids
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing.
Bundle Send Delay [0..4294967295 ms]
Indicates the maximum time that a single message sent out of this interface should be
delayed for in order to include it in a Bundle Message.
Rapid Retransmission Interval [0..4294967295 ms]
The interval in milliseconds before a message is first resent if no acknowledgement is

received.
Rapid Retransmission Decay [0..4294967295 ms]
unacknowledged RSVP message sent out of this interface. A value of 0 indicates a constant
retransmission rate.
504 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Rapid Retransmission Limit [0..4294967295]
The maximum number of times a message is resent if no acknowledgement is received on

this interface.
Use Suggested Labels
Determines whether suggested labels will be used on this interface.
Use Refresh MSG area
Srefr Msgs
Indicates the level of refresh reduction support to be configured on this interface.
Bundle Send Msgs
No Req Ack
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 505
Bandthwidth tab
network interface
First Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the first priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
506 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Second Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the second priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Third Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the third priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Fourth Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the fourth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Fifth Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the fifth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Sixth Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the sixth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface . This is the true link capacity . The units are
bytes per second.
Seventh Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the seventh priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Eight Priority Level
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the eight priority evel, in IEEE floating point
bytes per second.
Maximum bandwidth
The maximum bandwidth on this interface, in IEEE floating point format, used to calculate
constrained routes. This is the true link capacity. The units are bytes per second.
Last Maximum bandwidth
The last advertised Maximum Bandwidth for this interface.
Maximum reservable bandwidth
The maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 507
In order to increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the
minimal percentage change of maximum reservable bandwidth that causes a new Opaque
LSA to be originated.
Last Maximum reservable bandwidth
The last advertised Maximum Reserved Bandwidth for this interface.
Last First Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the first priority level for this interface.
Last Second Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the second priority level for this interface.
Last Third Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the third priority level for this interface.
Last Fourth Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the fourth priority level for this interface.
Last Fifth Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the fifth priority level for this interface.
Last Sixth Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the sixth priority level for this interface.
Last Seventh Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the seventh priority level for this interface.
Last Eight Priority Level
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the eight priority level for this interface.
Minimal percentage maximum bandwidth
The maximum bandwidth on this interface In order to increase performance and reduce
network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of maximum
bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
Minimal percentage maximum reservable bandwidth
The maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. In order to increase performance and
reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of
maximum reservable bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
Minimal percentage unreserved bandwidth
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface. In order to increase performance and reduce
network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of unreserved
bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
Minimal percentage Max LSP bandwidth
The MAX LSP bandwidth for the various switching descriptors on this interface In order to
increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal
percentage change of MAX LSP bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
508 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Minimal percentage Min LSP Bandwidth
The Min LSP bandwidth for the various switching descriptors on this interface In order to
increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal
percentage change of Min LSP bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 509
38.4 Interface Configuration Entry Add
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> ..
This window allows to set parameter of the interface
Metric
SRLG IDs
510 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.5 Interface Configuration Entry Add
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Interfaces
This window provide the entries containing management information applicable to a particular
network interface
Local Endpoint ID
Configurable by Siemens Service staff only - local endpoint ID is always 0.0.0.0 read only.
Local Index
Name
The interface name.
Type
The interface type.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 511
Remote Router ID
For a point to point interface, this specifies the IPv4 router ID of the remote peer.
Remote Index
Remote interface index. For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index
assigned to this link by the remote peer, or for a DDRP level link, the remote endpoint node.
Note:
After setting all fields in the first window, with "next" button a second window will appear.
Metric [0..65535]
SRLG ID
512 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.6 Call List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS>Call List ...
This window describes the GMPLS Call interface attributes for Surpass hiT network elements.
Index
Values of hitCallIndex.
Indicates the desired operational status of this call.
Operational Status
Indicates the actual operational status of this call, which is typically but not limited to, a
function of the state of individual tunnels of this call.
Type
Type of requested call.
Source
Ipv4 node ID of call’s source node (ingress).
Destination
Ipv4 node ID of call’s destination node (egress).
Protection Class
The requested protection class for this call.
Name
The canonical name assigned to the call.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 513
Ingress Label Port
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions; interface identifier.
Egress Label Port
Ingress Label
The ingress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
Egress Label
The egress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
514 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.7 Call Entry Add

General tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List>Select

Add... button
This window provides the user to create an entry in the table that represents a call.
An entry can be created by a network administrator.
Index
Values of hitCallIndex.
Type
Type of call requested.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 515
Source
IPv4 node ID of the call’s source node (ingress).
Destination
IPv4 node ID of the call’s destination node (egress).
Name
Description
A textual string containing information about the call.
Deletion Mode
Whether to use forced or graceful deletion to delete the LSPs in this call.
Protection Class
Protection Switching History Size [0..65535]
The maximum number of entries in the protection switching history table.
516 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic tab

Add... button
An entry can be created by a network administrator
Wait Restore Timer [1..12 min]
The value of the Wait-To-Restore Timer, in minutes.
Max Recoveries [infinitive,1..10]
The maximum number of automatic recoveries for permanent calls.
Reversion
Whether or not to use reversion to the initial working and protecting LSPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 517
SDH NCC
Requested Number of Contiguous Components. Indicates the number of identical SDH VCs
that are requested to be concatenated.
SDH NVC [0..62]
This field indicates the number of signals that are requested to be virtually concatenated.
SDH Multiplier [1..62]
This field is a bit field indicating the number of identical signals that are requested for the LSP.
518 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Routing tab

Add... button
An entry can be created by a network administrator.
Ingress Label
The ingress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
Ingress Label Port
Egress Label
The egress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
Egress Label Port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 519
Diversity Type
The type of diversity requested for the call.
Setup Priority [0..7]
Indicates the setup priority for the tunnels in this call.
Holding Priority [0..7]
Indicates the holding priority for the tunnels in this call.
Working Hop List Index
Index into the TunnelHopTable entry that specifies the explicit route hops for the initial
working LSP in this call.
Protecting Hop List Index
Index into the TunnelHopTable entry that specifies the explicit route hops for the initial
protecting LSP in this call.
520 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.8 Working Hop List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> > Call List Add
button, Routing tab, select Working Hop List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the explicit route hops for
the initial working LSP.
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
Secondary index into this table identifying a particular hop.
IP Address
Represents the IP address associated.
IP Prefix Len
This value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
Hop Type
Read Only – This parameter cannot be configured – always set as strict.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 521
Include
Read Only – This parameter cannot be configured.
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
The explicit out-segment label to use on the forward path.
Reverse Label
The explicit in-segment label to use on the reverse path.
522 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.9 Add Working Hop List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> > Call List Add
button, Routing tab, select Working Hop List button
This window provides the user to add an entry in the table that specifies the explicit route
hops for the initial working LSP
List Index
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 523
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
LSP.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
Note:
If the user configures a hop list, the following warning is displayed to the user: "All hops from
ingress to egress needs to be configured by the user. Partially specified routes could lead to
unexpected results".
524 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.10 Protecting Hop List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Add
button, Routing tab, select Protecting Hop List button.
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the explicit route hops for
the initial protecting LSP
List Index
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
TE Link ID
Hop Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 525
Include
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
LSP.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
526 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.11 Add Protecting Hop List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Add
button, Routing tab, select Protecting Hop List button.
This window provides the user to add an entry in the table that specifies the explicit route
hops for the initial protecting LSP
List Index
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
TE Link ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 527
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
LSP.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
528 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.12 Call Entry Modify

General tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List> Select
the call, press Modify button
This window provides the user to modify an entry in the table that represents a call.
An entry can be modifyes by a network administrator
Destination
Ipv4 node ID of call’s destination node (egress).
Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 529
Deletion mode
Whether to use forced or graceful deletion to delete the LSPs in this call.
Protection Class
External Switch Requests
The present and requested external switch requests.
Protection Switching History Size [0..65535]
The maximum number of entries in the protection switching history table.
530 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic tab
Wait Restore Timer [0..12 min]
The value of the Wait-To-Restore Timer, in minutes.
Max Recoveries [infinitive,1..10]
The maximum number of automatic recoveries for permanent calls.
Total Recoveries
The total number of automatic recoveries that have been done for the call.
Reversion
Whether or not to use reversion to the initial working and protecting LSPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 531
SDH NCC
Requested Number of Contiguous Components. Indicates the number of identical SDH VCs
that are requested to be concatenated.
SDH NVC [1..62]
This field indicates the number of signals that are requested to be virtually concatenated.
SDH Multiplier [1..62]
This field is a bit field indicating the number of identical signals that are requested for the LSP.
532 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Routing tab
Ingress Label
The ingress label to be used. It is the same for both directions.
Ingress Label Port
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions.
Egress Label
The egress label to be used. It is the same for both directions.
Egress Label Port
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 533
Diversity Type
The type of diversity requested for the call.
Setup Priority [0..7]
Indicates the setup priority for the tunnels in this call.
Holding Priority [0..7]
Indicates the holding priority for the tunnels in this call.
534 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Events tab
Event Index
Secondary index into this table identifying a particular event.
Event Type
The event type.
Event Error Code
The event error code.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 535
Event Time
The time at which the event occured. This is presented as the value of SysUpTime when the
event occured.
536 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.13 Current Working/Protecting Hop List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List Select
call, Modify button, Routing tab, Working Hop List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that
Specifies the explicit route hops for the initial Current working/protecting list
List Index
Hop Index
IP Address
The Tunnel Hop Address for this tunnel hop.
IP Prefix Len
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 537
TE Link ID
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
LSP
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
538 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.14 LSP List (Call List)
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list> Select
the call, press LSP list button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels that are
part of the same call, as well as their statuses
Call LSP Index
Index of the call the LSP belongs to.
LSP Index
The TE-MIB LSP tunnel index.
LSP Instance
The TE-MIB LSP tunnel instance.
Ingress LSR ID
The TE-MIB LSP Ingress LSR Id.
Egress LSR ID
The TE-MIB LSP Egress LSR Id.
LSP Type
The LSP tunnel type.
Failure Count
Number of transport plane failures on the LSP.
LSP STATUS area
The current status of the LSP tunnel.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 539
Initial
Set: the LSP tunnel was created during call creation.
Clear: otherwise.
Initial LSP tunnels are kept signaled after failures if the call is revertive
Current
Set: the LSP tunnel is part of the current working-protecting LSP tunnels pair
Clear: otherwise.
An LSP tunnel carrying traffic must be current
Working
This flag shows the way LSP tunnel is signale in the network: its value is meaningless in case
the Current flag is not Set (Clear).
Set: LSP tunnel is signalled as working
Clear: LSP tunnel is signalled as protecting
Active
Set: the LSP tunnel carries traffic
Clear: the LSP tunnel does not carry traffic
Failure
Set: the LSP tunnel in case of transport plane failure
Clear: the LSP tunnel in case of transport plane failure
Errors
Set: the LSP tunnel in case of signaling failure
Clear: the LSP tunnel in case of signaling failure
Dow trap
Set: the LSP tunnel is down in signalling
Clear: the LSP tunnel is up in signalling
Init working
This flag makes sense when the initial flag is set only
Set: the LSP tunnel was initially created as working
Clear: the LSP tunnel was initially created as protecting
Note :
When an LSP coming from the same type of protection schemes is relocated, the LCT,
clicking on the relocate button, shows the following warning message:"If Lockout Of
Protection or Forced Switch To Protection are not set the operation could be rejected".
540 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
As before if a relocation list is created without doing one of the two commands (LP or FtP), a
message reporting "The Operation is not allowed" is showed by LCT and the NE refuses the
operation.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 541
38.15 Relocation LSP List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Select the
call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Relocation LSP List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the desired explicit route
hops for the LSP to be relocated.
List Index
Hop Index
IP Prefix Len
TE Link ID
The index of the TE link to be included in the list.
Hop Type
Denotes whether this tunnel hop is routed in a strict or loose fashion.
542 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Include
Read Only - This parameter can not be configurable.
Computation
1: Dynamic
2: Explicit
If this value is set to dynamic, then the user should only specify the source and destination of
the path and expect that the CSPF will calculate the remainder of the path. If this value is set
to explicit, the user should specify the entire path for the tunnel to take.
Forward Present
GMPLS network
LSP.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
WARNING: Before relocating a LSP, a lockout of pretection has to be performed.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 543
38.16 LSP List Hop Table Entry Add
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List
Select the call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Relocation LSP List button >
Add List button
This window allows the user to add a new entry in the table
List Index
Hop Index
Address Type
The Hop Address Type of this tunnel hop.
Router ID
TE Link ID
Hop Type
544 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Read Only - This parameter can not be configurable – always set ad strict.
Include
Note:
If the user configures a hop list, the following warning is displayed to the user: "All hops from
ingress to egress needs to be configured by the user. Partially specified routes could lead to
unexpected results".
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 545
38.17 LSP Entry Details

General tab
Select the call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Details button
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
LSP Name
Encoding
This object indicates the encoding of the LSP being requested.
546 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Admin Status
Oper Status
Indicates the actual operational status of this call, which is typically but not limited to, a
function of the state of individual tunnels of this call.
Description
Is Interface
Denotes whether or not this tunnel corresponds to an interface represented in the interfaces
group table.
Interface Index
This value contains the LSR-assigned ifIndex which corresponds to an entry in the interfaces
table. Otherwise this variable should contain the value of zero indicating that a valid ifIndex
was not assigned to this tunnel interface.
Deletion Mode
Whether to use forced or graceful deletion to delete this LSP.
Secondary
Indicates that the requested LSP is a secondary LSP and not a primary LSP.
ADMIN STATUS box
Del In Progress
Determines the setting of the Admin Status flags in the Admin Status object.
Down
Testing
Reflect
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 547
Traffic tab
Source TNA address
Type of the source TNA address of this tunnel. This field is used for UNI. For standard MPLS
and GMPLS, this field must be set to none.
Destination TNA address
Type of the destination TNA address of this tunnel. This field is used for UNI. For standard
MPLS and GMPLS, this field must be set to none.
548 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Routing tab
Setup Prio
Indicates the setup priority of this tunnel.
Holding Prio [0..7]
Indicates the holding priority for this tunnel.
Switching Type
Indicates the type of switching that should be performed on a particular link.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 549
Path Computation
Path Computation Type
Is SPC
This flag indicates whether the tunnel is an OIF soft permanent connection (SPC).
GP ID
This object indicates the payload carried by the LSP. It is only required when GMPLS will be
used for this LSP
Sink TP
TunnelEgressLabel
LCT only displays the first 10 bytes of this field.They represent the QST address of the sink
TP at the partner NE.
Omit ERO
Indicates whether the explicit route object should be omitted from the Path message when the
tunnel consists of just one loose hop.
End to End Rerouting
Indicates that Crankback End to End rerouting should be enabled on this LSP.
Setting this flag will cause Rerouting information to be returned to the ingress node on
PathErrs and Notifications.
SESSION ATTRIBUTES box
Fast Reroute
This bitmask indicates optional session values for the GMPLS tunnels in this call.
This flag indicates that the any tunnel hop may choose to reroute this tunnel without tearing it
down.
Merging Permitted
This flag permits transit routers to merge this session with other RSVP sessions for the
purpose of reducing resource overhead on downstream transit routers, thereby providing
better network scalability.
Is Persistent
Indicates whether this tunnel should be restored automatically after a failure occurs.
Is Pinned
This flag indicates whether the loose routed hops of this tunnel are to be pinned.
Record Route
This flag indicates whether or not the signaling protocol should remember the tunnel path
after it has been signaled.
550 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection tab
Protecting
Indicates that the requested LSP is a protecting LSP and not a working LSP.
Type
This field indicates the level of end-to-end protection for this LSP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 551
Statistics tab
Created
Specifies the value of SysUpTime when the first instance of this tunnel came into existence.
Uptime
This value identifies the total time that this tunnel instance's operStatus has been Up.
Total Uptime
This value identifies the total time that this tunnel instance's operStatus has been Up.
552 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
UNI tab
UNI Service Level
Indicates the UNI service level.
UNI Egress Label
The label to be used at the destination UNI in the forward direction.
UNI Egress Label Port
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (forward) data link at the
destination UNI.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 553
UNI Reverse Egress Label
The label to be used at the destination UNI in the reverse direction.
UNI Reverse Label Port
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (reverse) data link at the
destination UNI.
UNI Ingress Label
The label to be used for the in-segment at the source UNI-N in the forward direction.
UNI Ingress Label Port
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (forward) data link for the in-
segment at the source UNI-N.
UNI Reverse Ingress Label
The label to be used at the source UNI-N for the out-segment in the reverse direction.
UNI Reverse Ingress Label Port
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a data link for the reverse out-
segment at the source UNI-N.
554 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Error tab
Last Error Type
The nature of the last error.
0: No Error
1: Unknown
2: Protocol
3: Path Computation
4: Local Configuration
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 555
5: Local Resources
6: Local Other
Last Time
The time at which the last error occurred.
Report Type
The address type of the error reported.
Reporter
The address of the node reporting the last error, or the address of the resource (such as an
interface) associated with the error.
Code
The primary error code associated with the last error.
Subcode
The secondary error code associated with the last error and the protocol used to signal this
tunnel.
TLVs
The sequence of interface identifier TLVs reported with the error by the protocol code.
Help String
A textual string containing information about the last error, recovery actions and support
advice.
556 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.18 Tunnel List AR Hop table
Select the call, press LSP List button, select the LSP and click on Details button> Routing
TAB
List Index
AR Hop Index
The Tunnel ARHop Table is used to indicate the hops, strict or loose, for an GMPLS tunnel
defined in TunnelTable, as reported by the GMPLS signaling protocol for the outgoing
direction of the tunnel.
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
Forward Global
This bitmask indicates the presence and status of labels.
For the Present bits, a set bit indicates that a label is present for this hop in the route.
Reverse Present
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 557
Reverse Global
Explicit Label
Denotes the type of the label configured in TunnelCHopExplicitLabel.
Reverse Label
Denotes the type of the label configured in TunnelCHopExplicitReverseLabel.
IP Address
Interface
This value will contain the interface identifier of the unnumbered interface for this hop.
558 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.19 GMPLS Tunnel Hop List Config
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS>
This window describes the attributes / entry in the table that specifies the tunnel hop list
configuration
Filter
List Index : allows list index selection
Hop Index : allows Hop index selection
Set Filter : enable filter selection
Reset Filter : reset filter selection
List Index
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
TE Link ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 559
Hop Type
Read Only - This parameter can not be configurable – always set as strict.
Include
Forward Present
GMPLS network
LSP.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
560 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.20 Tunnel List C Hop table
TAB
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the hops, strict or loose, for
an MPLS tunnel defined in the table.
List Index
C Hop Index
Secondary index into this table identifying the particular hop.
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
Reverse Present
Explicit Label
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 561
Reverse Label
Interface
If TunnelCHopAddrType is Unnumbered Interface, the address of Unnumbered Interface

Router ID of this hop.
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
562 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.21 GMPLS tunnel List PPRO Hop Table
TAB
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the hops for an MPLS
tunnel defined in the table.
Ingress
The Ingress LSR ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Egress
The Egress LSR ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Tunnel ID
The Tunnel ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
LSP ID
The LSP ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Index
Index into this table identifying the particular hop.
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 563
Address Unnumber
This value will contain the interface identifier of the unnumbered interface for this hop.
Forward Present
GMPLS network.
Reverse Present
Forward Global
This bitmask indicates the presence and status of labels
Reverse Global
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
564 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
38.22 LSP List
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS>LSP List
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels that are
part of the same call, as well as their statuses.
Tunnel Index
The TE-MIB LSP tunnel index.
Tunnel Instance
The TE-MIB LSP tunnel instance.
Ingress LSR ID
The TE-MIB LSP Ingress LSR Id.
Egress LSR ID
The TE-MIB LSP Egress LSR Id.
LSP name
The LSP name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 565
38.23 Overall Performace

Performance>Overall ...
This window provides the user the entry that describes the GMPLS CMS interface attributes
for Surpass hiT network elements.
Starting Time
Starting time of the measurement period.
Packets Tx
Total number of packets transmitted.
566 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
KBytes Tx
Total number of KiloBytes transmitted.
Packets Rx
Total number of packets received.
KBytes Rx
Total number of KiloBytes received.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 567
38.24 RSVP Performance

Performance>RSVP
This window provides the user the entry that describes the GMPLS CMS interface attributes
for Surpass hiT network elements.
568 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Packets Tx
Total number of packets transmitted.
KBytes Tx
Total number of KiloBytes transmitted.
Packets Rx
Total number of packets received.
KBytes Rx
Total number of KiloBytes received.
Hello Packets Tx
Total number of RSVP Hello packets transmitted.
Path/Resv Packets Tx
Total number of RSVP Path and Resv packets transmitted.
SRefresh Packets Tx
Total number of RSVP SRefresh packets transmitted.
Other Packets Tx
Total number of RSVP other packets transmitted.
Hello KBytes Tx
Total number of RSVP Hello KiloBytes transmitted.
Path/Resv KBytes Tx
Total number of RSVP Path and Resv KiloBytes transmitted.
SRefresh KBytes Tx
Total number of RSVP SRefresh KiloBytes transmitted.
Other KBytes Tx
Total number of RSVP other KiloBytes transmitted.
Hello Packets Rx
Total number of RSVP Hello packets received.
Path/Resv Packets Rx
Total number of RSVP Hello packets received.
SRefresh Packets Rx
Total number of RSVP SRefresh packets received.
Other Packets Rx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 569
Total number of RSVP other packets received.
Hello KBytes Rx
Total number of RSVP Hello KiloBytes received.
Path/Resv KBytes Rx
Total number of RSVP Path and Resv KiloBytes received.
SRefresh KBytes Rx
Total number of RSVP SRefresh KiloBytes received.
Other KBytes Rx
Total number of RSVP other KiloBytes received.
570 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
39 IF7FE2GEL2 card
39.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config

L2 Switch tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select L2 Switch tab).
General
System MAC address
Burned-In MAC Address in Hexadecimal Format
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 571
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
Tunneling MAC Address
The Tunneling Mac Address used for Trasparent Transport Of Customer BPDUs.
Aging Timeout
The FDB entry's address aging timeout (in seconds).
Tag Protocol Interface
Enable protocol identifier selection, the value indicates that the frame carries the protocol tag
information
GARP
Enable GVRP
The administrative status requested by management for GVRP. The value enabled (1)
indicates that GVRP should be enabled on this device, on all ports for which it has not been
specifically disabled. When disabled (2), GVRP is disabled on all ports and all GVRP packets
will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Enable GMRP
The administrative status requested by management for GMRP. The value enabled(1)
indicates that GMRP should be enabled on this device, in all VLANs, on all ports for which it
has not been specifically disabled. When disabled(2), GMRP is disabled, in all VLANs, on all
ports and all GMRP packets will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
572 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Broadcast tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Broadcast tab).
Broadcast mode
The item allows to disable or to enable three different broadcast storm recovery modes
- no broadcast storm (NoBS)
- Switch wide broadcast storm control (SwW)
- Per port broadcast storm control (PBS)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 573
- Per port bandwith policing (PBwP)
Switch Wide Limit
This item store the limit to be used switch wide (i.e. on all the ports)
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
Broadcast ID/ Policing ID
This object represents an istance out of 8 policing values in this table
Broadcast Storm Rate / Policing rate
This table store committed broadcast storm rate value over witch the exceeding broadcast
packets are discarded. This table store committed policing rate values. This is the sstained
rate permitted by policing.
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
574 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
STP tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select STP tab).
Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled
Spanning tree operational status on the switch.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 575
Force Version
The MST configuration force protocol version.
1: STP
2: Rapid STP
3: Multi STP
MST Region Name
The MST configuration name of at most 32 characters.
Revision
The MST configuration revision. The default value is 1.
Digest Key
The MST configuration digest key.
Value as Hexadecimal.
Format Selector
The MST configuration format selector. A value different from 0 (zero) indicates non-support
for the IEEE 802.1s standard is not supported.
The MST tab is only available when the Force Version has the value Multi STP
If the Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled is enable and the user wants to change the Force
Version, then a Warning message "For Configuring the STP Force Version you must disable
STP Globally Enabled first!" will be shown.
576 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
CST tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select CST tab).
CONFIG
Bridge Hello Time [1..10 s]
The MSTP bridge hello time for the CIST. The default value is 2.
Bridge Forward Delay [4..30 s]
The MSTP bridge forward delay for the CIST. The default value is 15.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 577
Bridge Max Age
The MSTP bridge max age for the CIST.
Rules:
2 * (BHT + 1) <= BMA <= 2 * (BFD - 1)
BHT - Bridge Hello Time
BMA - Bridge Max Age
BFD - Bridge Forward Delay
Bridge Priority
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
0 | 4096 | 8192 | 12288 | 16384 | 20480 | 24576 | 28672 | 32768 | 36864 | 40960 | 45056 |
49152 | 53248 | 57344 | 61440
Status
Max Age [s]
The MSTP root port max age for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Forward Delay [s]
The MSTP root port forward delay for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Hello Time [s]
The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on
any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of hundredths
of a second.
Bridge Hold Time [s]
The MSTP bridge hold time for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
CST Regional Root ID
The MSTP regional root identifier for the CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Regional Root Path Cost
The MSTP regional root path cost for the CIST.
Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change for this CIST.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Topology Change Count
578 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The MSTP count of topology changes for this CIST.
Topology Change Parameter
The MSTP topology change parameter for this CIST.
1: True
2: False
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost for this CIST.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 579
MST tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab).
MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP instance ID.
Range: 1..4094
580 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Bridge Priority [0.61440]
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier in a specific instance.
Hexadecimal Value
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier.
Hexadecimal Value.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost.
Value as delivered.
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID.
Hexadecimal Value.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change.
Topology Change Count
The MSTP count of topology changes.
Topology Change Parameter
The MSTP topology change parameter.
Value
1: True
2: False
VLANs
The NSTP VLAN-IDs list.
String with the VLAN-IDs separated by ";"
Buttons Function
Add…
Opens the MST Entry Add window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 581
Modify
Only visible if an entry in the MST Grid is selected.
Delete
Only visible if an entry in the MST Table is selected. Deletes the selected Entry.
Opens the message box "Delete selected MST Entry?" on delete.
IGMP Snooping tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select IGMP Snooping tab).
582 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IGMP Snooping Enabled
This enables or disables IGMP Snooping on the system. Default values is disabled
1: Checked /Enabled
Interval
IGMP group interval time on the system. This is time that the switch will wait before deleting
the interface from the entry because it do not receive a report from a particular interface.
Default value is 260s. Range 1:3600
Max Response Time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max response time for the system. The max
response time is the time that the switch will wait after sending a query in an interface
because it does not receive a report from a particular group in that interface. Default value is
10s . Range 1:3600
Expiration time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max expiration time. It is the time that the
switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed
from the list of the interface with a multicast routers attached. Default value is 0s. Range
0:3600
Multicast Control Frames Processed
Multicast Control Frames Processed by the CPU. The number of multicast control frames that
have been processed by the CPU
Port IGMP Snooping Disabled
Shows all available Ports configured in this card.
Port IGMP Snooping Enabled
LCT / OS can configure the IGMP Snooping operation per port. The value enable indicates
that IGMP Snooping is enable on this port in all VLAs . A value disable indicates that IGMP
Snooping is disabled on the port in all VLANs.
Show the selected Available Ports. Multiple selection supported.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 583
COS tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select COS tab).
User Priority
The default ingress User Priority for this port.
A table that contains information about the 802.1p prioeity mapping to traffic class priority
queue for every physical port.
User Priority [0..7]
584 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Class [0..3]
Traffic class priority queue the received frame is mapped to.
VLAN Translation tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Translation tab).
VLAN Change Mode
The item allows to disable or to enable such different VLAN change modes
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 585
No Change (NoCh)
Per VLANID change (Vch)
Per port change (Pch)
Per port and per VLAN ID change (PVCh)
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Egress VLAN Id
The set of ports which are permanently assigned to the egress list for this VLAN by
management.
VLAN Priority tab
586 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority tab).
VLAN ID
VLAN Mode
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure the mode of operation for a VLAN Id.
Trap tab
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 587
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Trap tab).
Link Up/Down
Link Up/Link Down traps for the entire switch.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Spanning Tree
This flag enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
588 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Mirroring tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Mirroring tab).
Mirroring Mode
Port mirroring mode:
Enable : enable mirroring mode
Disable : disable mirroring mode
Delete : clear mirrored port and probe
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 589
Port configuration : shows the probe port
Probe Port
Shows the probe port
Mirrored Port
Shows the mirrored port.
590 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> Add push-
button.
MST ID
The MSTP instance ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Multiple selection supported.
Selected
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 591
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.
592 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> select on
entry -> Modify push-button.
MST ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Selected
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 593
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.
594 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> Add
push-button.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 595
39.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> select
an entry row -> Modify push-button.
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode
596 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Status
The status of Vlan Priority Map Entry
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 597
39.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config

Permanent MAC’s tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Permanent MACs tab).
PERMANENT MACS
The switch’s static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Port Names
The Static MAC Filter destination port mask.
598 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Learned MAC’s tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Learned MACs tab).
Learned MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database Table.
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
Status
The status of this entry.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 599
1: Other
2: Invalid
3: Learned
4: Self
5: Mgmt
600 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
MAC Address
Destination Ports
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be even for Unicast Addresses."
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 601
39.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
Destination Ports
602 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config

Permanent MACs tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Permanent MACs tab.
PERMANENT MACS
The switch's static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.
Destination Port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 603
Registered MACs tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Registered MACs tab.
Registered MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database table
VLAN ID
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Protocol
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.
1: Static
2: GMRP
3: IGMP
Type
This displays the type of the entry.
1: Static
2: Dinamic
604 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Description
Text description of this multicast table entry.
Forward Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be forwarded.
Filter Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be filtered.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 605
39.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: :
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Note:
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
606 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> (select an entry in the table) -
> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Note:
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 607
39.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports...
A list of interface entries.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
MAC Address
A Multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
The desired state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
Operational Status
The current operational state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
608 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
this port.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 609
39.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config

General tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> General tab.
GENERAL
802.3ad LACP Mode
Enable/disable 802.3ad LACP on this port.
Values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Administrative Mode
The switch's Port Admin Mode.
Local Ports:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Logical Ports:
1: Enabled
610 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2: Disabled
Auto-Negotiation
This object identifies the administration status of auto negotiation for this port.
Freeze MAC Address Learning
Manager can freeze all the dynamically learned MAC addresses assocated to a port, and stop
the learning mode on this port.
1: Freeze
2: Unfreeze
Double VLAN Tag Mode
Controls the Double Vlan Tag mode on this port.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Double VLAN Tag Customer ID [0..4095]
Configures the Customer ID for the Double Vlan Tag for this port.
Range: 0..4095
Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the largest value that can be configured for agentPortMaxFrameSize.
Enable Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the currently configured maximum frame size value for this port. The
maximum value that this object can be set to is the value of agentPortMaxFrameSizeLimit.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 611
VLAN tab
push-button... -> VLAN tab.
VLAN
this port.
Range: 2..4094
Acceptable Frames Filtering
When this is admitOnlyVlanTagged (2) the device will discard untagged frames or Priority-
Tagged frames received on this port. When admitAll(1), untagged frames or Priority-Tagged
frames received on this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
1: Admit all
2: Admit only VLAN tagged
Default User Priority [0..7]
The default ingress User Priority for this port.
612 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GVRP/GMRP tab
push-button... -> GVRP/GMRP tab.
GVRP/GMRP
GVRP Port Status
The administrative state of GMRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that
GMRP is enabled on this port in all VLANs as long as dot1dGmrpStatus is also enabled (1). A
value of disabled(2) indicates that GMRP is disabled on this port in all VLANs: any GMRP
packet received will be silently discarded and no GMRP registrations will be propagated from
other ports.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GMRP Port Status
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP is
enabled on this port, as long as dot1qGvrpStatus is also enabled for this device. When
disabled (2) but dot1qGvrpStatus is still enabled for the device, GVRP is disabled on this port:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GARP TIMERS
Join Time [1..100 cs]
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 613
A table of GARP control information about every bridge port.
Range: 1..100
Leave Time [20..600 cs]
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds.
Range: 20..600
Leave All Time [200..6000 cs]
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds.
Range: 200..6000
STP tab
push-button... -> STP tab.
STP
STP Port State
The administrative STP state for the port.
614 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The default port STP state is enabled for the first 4095 ports and disabled for any ports
beyond.
1: Checked / Enabled
Port Up Time Since Counter were Cleared
Time since port was reset. It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Note: For a correct handling of LAG, the STP should be enabled on the involved parts.
CST tab
push-button... -> CST tab.
CONFIG
Edge State
The administrative state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 615
The default port state is disabled.
Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
The default value is 128.
Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
STATUS
Operation Status of Edge Port
The MSTP operational status of a specific port for the CIST.
1: Enable
2: Disable
Is Part of P2P Link
The MSTP operational point to point mac of a specific port for the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in CIST.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in CIST.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in CIST.
Designated Cost
616 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in CIST.
Topology Changing
The MSTP topology change acknowledge for a specific port in the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port Role
The STP port role.
MST tab
push-button... -> MST tab.
MST ID [1..4094]
Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
The default value is 128.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 617
Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in a specific instance.
Value as Delivered.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Cost
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in a specific instance.
Port Role
The STP port role.
618 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Policing tab
push-button... -> Policing tab.
Policing
This item indicates the status of the port policing control that can be:
1: checked / enabled
2: unchecked /disabled
Broadcast Limit /Policing CIR
This specifies the bandwith limit of the indexed port, over which the broadcast packets are
discarded.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 619
Tunnelling tab
push-button... -> Tunnelling tab.
Network Interface Mode
The Switch's Port is configured either in UNI or NNI Mode.
1: User to Network Interface
2: Network to Network Interface
BPDU Tunneling
The switch's Port is configured for BPDU Tunneling.
1: Tunneling
2: No Tunneling
This Box is deactivated if the Port is Configured in UNI mode.
620 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Translation tab
push-button... -> VLAN Translation tab.
Egress VLAN ID
The item represents an egress vlan Id that replaces the incoming vlan Id on the incoming
port. This table is significant if Vlan Change Mode is equal to "Per port change" . It store the
out Vlan ID Tag that translate the ingress tags received on the port Id.
Incoming Vlan Id
It represents an istance of incoming Vlan Id.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 621
Egress QoS tab
push-button... -> Egress QoS tab.
Number of Egress Traffic Classes
The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.
A table of Queueing Mode parameters.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queueing Mode
The queue mode to be set or get for the specified queue.
1: Disabled
2: Strict Priority Queueing
3: Weighted Fair Queueing
Queueing Weight Factor
Weight Factor is a 16 bit value which limits total bandwidth that a queue occupies in case of
congestion.
622 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Deficit Count
The deficit count for the queue, a 21 bit value which is reduced by the packet length for every
packet transmitted from the queue.
Traffic Shaping tab
push-button... -> Traffic Shaping tab.
Port rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queue rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping
This value can be setup in 64kps steps up to the port cpacity (10, 100, Mbps or 1 Gbps).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 623
39.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information

ETH Packets tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> ETH Packets tab.
ETH PACKETS
A list of interface entries.
Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a

subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
624 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in
length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
STP tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> STP tab.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 625
STP BPDU Rx
The STP BPDUs received on a specific port.
STP BPDU Tx
The STP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Rx
The RSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Tx
The RSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Rx
The MSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Tx
The MSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
626 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG...
Lag ID
This value corresponds with the Lag interface in the ifTable
Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type
1: static
2: dynamic
LAG ID Ports
Port speed
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 627
LAG port speed
Port
Lag port index
Status
Lag port status
1: active
2: inactive
628 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> Add... push button.
Name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 629
39.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.
Name
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type
630 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> LAG Statistics push
button.
Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a

subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 631
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
Errors Occurred RX
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them form being delivered
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this item uniquely identifies this entry.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
632 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups...
Group
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Port Group number
Ports
Rx Water Port Group string
Flow Control
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Note:
Fast Ethernet ports do not support asymmetrical modes.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 633
Drop
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Drop value.
634 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Queue Config...
push button.
Group
This specifies the Port Group number
Queue
This specifies TX Water Mark Queue number
Water Mark
This specifies Tx Water Mark Value for the Port Group queue.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 635
39.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info

Current tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> Current tab.
FILTER
Severity
The alarm severity selection
Trap
Selection of Trap
Set Filter
Filter selection
636 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TRAP
The traps sent since last viewed.
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
Severity
The severity associated
Trap Object Severity Threshold
broadcastStormStartTr Port Minor The broadcastStormStart trap is issued

ap when the number of broadcast packets
received in a second from a port is
higher than the broadcast threshold (via
sysConfigBroadcastThreshold).
broadcastStormEndTra Port Cleared (Not The broadcastStormStop trap is issued

p Alarmed) when the number of broadcast packets
received in a second from a port is
lower than the broadcast threshold (i.e.
signals that a BroadcastStormStart
don’t exist anymore).
linkDown Port Major The linkDown trap is issued when the

sending protocol entity recognizes a
failure in one of the communication
links represented in the agent's
configuration.
linkUp Port Cleared (Not The linkUp trap is issued when the
Alarmed) sending protocol entity recognizes that
one of the communication links
represented in the agent's configuration
has come up (i.e. signals that a
linkDown don’t exist anymore).
RemoteFault Port Minor The RemotFault trap is issued when the

attached remote device signals to the
local end a fault condition.
NoRemoteFault Port Cleared (Not The NoRemotFault trap is issued when

Alarmed) the attached remote device signals to
the local end a removed fault condition.
MismatchAutoNegotiati Port Minor The MismatchAutoNegotiation trap is

on issued on local device, when the
remote device does not support the
required operation parameters.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 637
NoMismatchAutoNegoti Port Cleared (Not The NoMismatchAutoNegotiation trap is

ation Alarmed) issued on local device, when the
remote device supports the required
operation parameters (i.e. signals that a
MismatchAutoNegotiation does not
exist anymore).
NoCompleteAutoNegoti Port Major The NoCompleteAutoNegotiation trap is

ation issued on local device, when the Auto
Negotiation process was not completed
within 10s.
CompleteAutoNegotiati Port Cleared (Not The CompleteAutoNegotiation trap is

on Alarmed) issued on local device, when the
AutoNegotiation process was
completed within 10s.
NoValidCDB Card Major The NoValidCDB trap is issued when

the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB)
file is not valid (corrupted, wrong
format, etc.)
ValidCDB Card Cleared (Not The ValidCDB trap is issued when the
Alarmed) CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file
is valid.
638 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
History tab
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> History tab.
LOG
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
Description
Description of the trap sent
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 639
39.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration.
This table contains information about every aggregate that is associated with the System
Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
MAC Address
A read only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator
System Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator
640 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
Partner System Priority
A read only value that indicates the priority value associated with the Partner System ID. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system priority value will be a value assigned by the
local system
Partner Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator’s current protocol partner
Collector Max Delay
This value defines the maximum delay, in terms of microsecond, that may be imposed by the
frame collector between receiving a frame from an aggregate Parser , and either delivering
the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 641
39.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Details push button.
Aggregator ID
Port Name
System ID Priority
System ID
aggregator
Administrator key
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
642 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Administrative Partner priority
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partner’s System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s
System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port.
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s
protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 643
Operational Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
644 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push button.
Aggregator ID
Port Name
System ID Priority
System ID
aggregator
Administrator key
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 645
Administrative Partner priority
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partner’s System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s
System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s
protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner
646 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Operational Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 647
39.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Statistics...
Interface
Port name
LACPDU Rx
The number of valid LACPDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Rx
The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this aggregation port
648 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Unknown Rx
The number of frames received that either carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but
contain an unknown PDU or are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do
not carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type
Illegal Rx
The number of frames received that carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol subtype
LACPDU Tx
The number of valid LACPDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Tx
The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 649
39.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Debug...
Filter
Interface
Port name
Port Name
An unique value for each interface
Rx State
The receive state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Current
650 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2. Expired
3. Defaulted
4. Initialize
5. LACP Disabled
6. Port Disabled
Last Rx Time
The value of time when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation Port
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes and second
Mux State
The value of the MUX state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Detached
2. Waiting
3. Attached
4. Collecting
5. Distributing
6. Collecting-distributing
Mux reason
A human-readable text string indicating the reason for the most recent change of MUX state
machine
Churn State
The state of the Actor Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_ACTOR_CHURN or the
ACTOR_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn State
The state of the Partner Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_PARTNER_CHURN or the
PARTNER_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Actors Churn state machine has entered the
ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Partner Churn state machine has entered the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Sync Transition Count
Count of the number of times the Actor’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 651
Partner Sync Transition Count
Count of the number of times the Partner’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC
state
Change Count
Count of the number of times the Actor’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed
Partner Change Count
Count of the number of times the Partner’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed
652 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Configuration...
VLAN ID
VLAN Type
The VLAN-type referring to this VLAN.
1. Other
2. Permanent
3. Dynamic GVRP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 653
39.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Add push-button...
VLAN ID [1..4096]
Port Name
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN
654 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 655
39.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID [1..4096]
Port Name
656 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Participation
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 657
39.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button.
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier referring to this VLAN.
Port Name
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
658 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> VLAN Statistics...
A table containing per-port, per-VLAN statistics for traffic received.
VLAN ID
Frames Tx
The number of valid frames transmitted by this port to its segment from the local forwarding
process for this VLAN.
Discarted Frames Rx
The number of valid frames received by this port from its segment which were classified as
belonging to this VLAN which were discarded due to VLAN related reasons.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 659
39.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
Shows all Local Ports, Logical Ports and LAGs Available.
A list of Ethernet statistics entries.
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this object uniquely identifies this etherStats entry.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data that this etherStats entry is configured to analyze.
String with the ethernet interface on this device.
Dropped Events
resources.
660 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Octets
Packets
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
Multicast Packets
CRC Align Errors
Undersize Packets
well formed.
Oversize Packets
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 661
39.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an item in the table) -> Details push-button..
Dropped Events
resources.
Octets
Packets
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
Multicast Packets
662 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
CRC Align Errors
Undersize Packets
well formed.
Oversize
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 663
39.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Control...
History Control Index
An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
This source can be any ethernet interface on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Buckets Granted
The number of discrete sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
Range: 1..3600
Status
The status of this historyControl entry.
1: Valid
664 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2: Under Creation
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 665
39.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Add push-button..
An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
Range: 1..3600
666 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
39.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
Shows all History Control Indexes Available.
This Index uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interval (s) [1..3600 s]
Shows Time Intervals for Filtration.
Range [1..3600 (1 hour)]
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by
the same value of historyControlIndex.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 667
Interface
Sample Index
An index that uniquely identifies the particular sample this entry represents among all
samples associated with the same historyControlEntry.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a
bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
668 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Jabbers
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 669
39.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-
button...
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the
same value of historyControlIndex.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
670 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
Jabbers
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 671
672 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
40 IFS10GBE
40.1 IFS10GBE Config
the IFS10GBE symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
The operator can select if transferring the error LOG.
This kind of protection is made on switching fabric cards, and it is basically made of a set of
two cross-connections from (Head End) or to (Tail End) the same resource.
Displays the create and delete cross-connections in the switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 673
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
40.2 IFS10GBE Port Provisioning Config
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
674 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.3 IFS10GBE Card Label Info
Card Label Info – Card Specific tab
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 675
676 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.4 IFS10GBE Port Config
Contains the information of which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been
connected to.
Loopback (if applicable)
Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Enabled:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 677
678 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.5 IFS10GBE Vlan Traffic Flow
This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menus of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 679
group and VC symbol indicates that, for this GFP group, no VC assignment has been done
yet. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each
VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.
Note for VLAN operation:
The VLAN functionality is meaningful only if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications, QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer, as well as
the egress buffers, of a receiving FE card may happen. By this, packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.
Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected BRAS
does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of the receiving
FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow control has influence on
all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the possible 8 downlink ports). If
for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the activated pause frame mechanism will
stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).
680 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.6 IFS10GBE ETH Traffic Flow
the context menus.
Notes:
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 681
40.7 IFS10GBE GFP Group Selection
This window shows the GFP Group traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
682 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.8 IFS10GBE VC4 Selection
This window shows the VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 683
40.9 IFS10GBE ETH <n> Traffic Flow
the context menus.
Notes:
coherences.
684 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.10 IFS10GBE GFP Group <n> Traffic Flow
Note:
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 685
40.11 IFS10GBE GFP <n> Traffic Flow
Note:
coherences.
686 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.12 GFP Group Selection
This window shows the GFP Group traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 687
40.13 ETH Configuration
Supervision
not used ports.
Flow Control
688 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Enabled:
Note:
Disabled:
path is available).
Local Fault Indication
Enable / Disable
Local Fault Laser Shutdown
Enable / Disable
Laser Data:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 689
SFPs.
690 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.14 GFP Group Frame performance
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring
performance monitoring is enabled.
Display Meaning
Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval
Current 15min Corresponding entries
Current 24h Corresponding entries
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 691
Previous 15 min tab
Previous 24 min tab
692 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Date
Date of the current interval
Time
Time of the current interval
TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.
Dropped Frames Rx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
Total frames Rx
The total frames received
Average Throughput
Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of ethernet frames in the passed

measuring interval
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 693
40.15 Asic data information
> Information -> ASIC Data...
This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.
694 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
40.16 LCAS State Configuration
> Configuration -> LCAS State...
This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.
Filter:
The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.
Selected Item:
Sink
Source
Note:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
failed = failure in the signal
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 695
696 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Security Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
41 Security
41.1 Access Information
The window shows the actual access right.
You:
The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".
Nobody:
If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface,
"F-interface" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 697
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Security
41.2 NMS NE Password
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...
The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems: OS, LCT and NCT.
Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in
the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in
the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to
the default password.
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password
and type the new password twice.
Password build rule:
The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.
Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will
be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.
Note:
When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new
password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).
If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.
698 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Security Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
41.3 Change Password to Default
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...
Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.
The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 699
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Security
700 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Software Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
42 Software
42.1 Software Management
> Software Management...
This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers
software download functions.
Active APS:
Order Number
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
SW/FW Code
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
APS Record...
Opens the Active APS Record window.
Active APS Compatibility...
Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 701
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Software
Inactive APS:
Load State
Load State Description
Not loaded No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE,

and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download
Being loaded Software download in progress
Loaded A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE
Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download
Initialized The software storage medium is prepared for software download
Order Number
Displays the order number of the inactive APS.
SW/FW Code
Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.
Download... / Delta Download...
Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.
Clicking Open opens the Software Download window.
If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the
inactive APS to active
Swap APS
With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is
induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the
startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous
APS.
After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.
702 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
42.2 Software Download
> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -
> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software
download process.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 703
42.3 Delta Software Download
> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant
file) -> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software
download process.
704 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
42.4 Active APS Record
> Software Management... -> APS Record...
This window displays details of the active APS record.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 705
42.5 APS Compatibility Information
> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...
This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application
Program System) object in a tree structure.
706 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
43 Fault Clearance
43.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:
Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply"
Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed"
Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
Alarm name: "Loss of Communication Between NE and Management System"
Q-interface link interrupted.
1. Check connection with Q connector
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 707
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
2. If the alarm persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm Name "Telemetry Interface n"
see TIF Fault Clearance
708 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
43.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:
• IFO155M
• IFQ622M
• IFS2G5
• IFS2G5B
• IFQ2G5
• IFQ2G5B
• IFS10G
• IFS10GB
• IFS10G-M
• IFS10G-R
• IFS10G-WLS
• IFQGBE
• IFQBEB
• IFOFE
• IFS40G-MX
• IFSOA
• IFSOA-PDC
• IFSOB
• IFSOB-PDC
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 709
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
Alarm name: "T0"
1. To clock failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
Alarm name: "T0X"
1. T0X clock set failure.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
1. T0Y clock set failure.
710 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n
Backplane signal failed.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"
Card unavailable.

Alarm name: "Port Absent"
The port module is missing.
1. Insert a port module of correct type.
Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"
The used port module type does not match the card interface.
1. Replace the port module by the correct type.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 711
TIF Fault Clearance
712 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
43.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

• IF2M
• IF345M
• IFO155M-E
• IFQGBE-E
• IFQGBEB-E
• IFOFE-E
• IFOFES-E
• IFOFGE-E
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:
Alarm name: "Major"

A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 713
Alarm name: "T0"
Internal NE system clock failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service..
Card failed.

Alarm name: "LSU n Missing" (only with IF2M cards)
Line Switching Unit missing.
1. Check the dedicated LSU.
2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the LSU / IF2M card.
Alarm name: "Protection Shelf Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)
Protection Shelf failed.
714 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1. Check the connections and the configuration.
Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply" (only with IFO155M-E)
Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)
Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
Alarm name: "PLC" (only with IFOFES-E)
Partial Loss of Capacity.
1. Check the configuration, what´s the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If
there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are
failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong
(too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
Alarm name: "TLC" (only with IFOFES-E)
Total Loss of Capacity
1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and
Tx (TLCT).
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 715
Alarm name: "FELNE" (only with IFOFES-E)
FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC
groups).
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS
is configured.
Alarm name: "FOPR" (only with IFOFES-E)
Failure of Protocol. The LCAS protocol has CRC errors.
1. Check if there is a degraded SDH link.
Alarm name: "MND" (only with IFOFES-E)
Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay
between each other is too great.
1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.
Alarm name:"SQM" (only with IFOFES-E)
Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way.
716 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TIF Fault Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 717
43.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

• SF2G5
• SF2G5
• SF10G
• SF160G
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:
Alarm name: "Major"

718 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarm name: "T0"
1. To clock failure.
Alarm name: "T0X"
1. T0X clock set failure.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
1. T0Y clock set failure.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.n
Alarm name: "Failuer of ISTM Xn" or "Failure of ISTM Yn"

Alarm name: "Failure of Internal Traffic Signal n"
Failure of Internal Traffic Signal.

Card unavailable.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 719

TIF Fault Clearance
720 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
43.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:
Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"
EOW failed.
Alarm name: "Fan Failure"
Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.
1. Replace the fan unit immediately.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 721
Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1 Failure", "Fan Unit 2 Failure"
One fan failed or at low speed.
1. Replace the fan unit soon.
Alarm name: "Flash SW"
Flash SW failed.
For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".
2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.
Alarm name: "T0"
T0 clock failure.
Alarm name: "T0X"
T0X clock set failure.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
T0Y clock set failure.
722 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarm name: "ULED Fail"
LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.
1. Replace the SCOH card.
SCOH card unavailable.
NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 723
43.6 TIF Fault Clearance
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:
As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.
724 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
43.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Guidelines) manual.
The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.
Alarm name: "Fan Failure"
At least one fan is at low speed or failed.
1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2
Failure",
see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 725
726 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (General Tasks) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
44 How to... (General Tasks)
44.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack
Parameters -> Configuration
3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the
address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.
Note:
The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be
changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 727
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (General Tasks)
44.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE
equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.
3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of
the selected card type is added to the Module View.
4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click
Configuration.
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack
728 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
44.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards
Configuring a traffic card:
2. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.
3. Select a card from the context menu.
4. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.
5. Click Apply.
The card will be added to the required equipping.
6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the
associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).
Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.
3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 729
44.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports
1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration ->
Port Provisioning...
2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens.

(An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly
equipped with a SDH interface card.)
3. Select Empty for every unused port.
4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.
5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are
equipped with the same card type and configured properly.
6. Click Apply.
How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
730 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
44.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object
to Object
2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.
3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy
Data...
(or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s)
you want to copy,
or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.
5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.
6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.
7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to
select all entries in the list.
8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 731
44.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...
2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and
card name.
3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.
4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.
5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
732 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
44.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging
Configuring ETH cards:
1. Set the dedicated MUX structure (only IFOFES-E):

Select the card -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview -> VC4
-> Configuration -> Mux Preparation.
2. Set the concatenation (only IFOFES-E):

Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. Select a template (not with IFOFES-E):

You should think before, which VC´s (capacity) are being used and then set a template,
cause a belated modification is only possible with traffic interruption of all ports.
Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC4-
6v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.
4. Setting of Bandwidth and Subchanneling:

Select the card -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
5. Switching the VC´s:

E.g. for a VC12-5v, 3 VC12 are switched via one SDH card/port and the other 2 VC12
via another SDH card/port. Therefore, not a VC12-5v must be selected, but the
particular VC12´s in the cross connection window.
6. Concerning LCAS:
For all involved VC´s, LCAS must be activated.
ETH traffic is not running:
1. Is the ETH link o.k.?

Check the ETH Configuration window.
2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window.
When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH
connection is sure).
3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP
Assignment window.
4. If subchanneling is configured, check that channel ID is identical with both partners.
5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated
or not; no mixed way)?
6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is
coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the
subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 733
734 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Timing) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
45 How to... (Timing)
45.1 How to Configure the Timing
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...
T0:
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window , right-click the T0 symbol ->

Configuration...
3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0:

T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of
the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).
- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received
quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not
override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
4. Click Apply. Click Close.
T1:
5. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration...

In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) and port(s) used as
timing references.
T3:
7. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration...

In the T3/T4 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information
about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)
9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3
symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.
10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system
clock selection.
11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a
synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red
cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source.
To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.
T4:
12. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...
13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode,
and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 735
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Timing)
15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output
selection.
16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.
17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can
enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR)
Time.
736 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Timing) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
45.2 How to Set Sync Priorities
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of
the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use".
If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will
change the other priorities automatically.
3. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 737
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Timing)
738 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Alarms) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
46 How to... (Alarms)
46.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Option Settings button.
2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed.
No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.
3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by
highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.
4. Click OK.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 739
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Alarms)
46.2 How to Suppress Alarms
Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms
1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or
SEC Alarms...
(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).
2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).

Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.
3. Click Apply.
Suppressing Communication Alarms
1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol.

(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).
2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...
3. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).
4. Click Apply.
740 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Alarms) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
46.3 How to Configure TIF Ports
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...
2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or
Open input polarity for each used TIF port.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 741
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Alarms)
742 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
47 How to... (Cross Connections)
47.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options
Setting cross connection filter options:
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the
filtering features.
3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.
Clearing all cross connection filter settings:
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings
change to All.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 743
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
47.2 How to Create a Cross Connection
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation
Counter N value (if applicable).
TP A:
4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
5. Click the button "To TPA >>"

The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
connection end point.
7. Click the button "To TPB >>"

The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
8. If no TP B’ termination point is required, proceed with step #12.
TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
10. Click the button "To TPB' >>"

The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
744 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).


9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 745


746 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619


A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 747
47.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection
1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure
on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.
5. Select the VC12/VC3 connection layer.
6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.
7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.
8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-
>Close).
9. Select the applicable TP indexes.
Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible
TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).
12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings).
748 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.7 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12-nv/VC3-2v Cross Connection
1. Before a cross connection at VC12nv/ VC3-2v level could be performed, the following
preliminary step need to be carried out:
on the LO matrix (SF10G / SF2G5) two VC12-nv/VC3-2v groups need to be created (see
also 52.2 “How to configure SDH concatenations”): a first one to be connected to the first
SDH card and the second to be connected to the second SDH card; in this phase the
operator must care that the two new groups are consistent (i.e. they include the same
members) with the circuits to be connected from the SDH cards.
Example: if the VC3-2v coming from the first SDH line card uses VC3 #2 and #3, the
VC3-2v configured on the LO matrix that will be connected to this group must include the
same members: dually, if the VC3-2v coming from the second SDH line card uses VC3
#2 and #3, the VC3-2v configured on the LO matrix that will be connected to this group
must include the same members:
In case of VC12-nv groups to be connected the same attention has to be paid.
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.
5. Select the VC12-nv or VC3-2v connection layer.
6. Select the first SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected.
7. Select the second SDH card in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B
Selection field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected
8. Click Propose Connection: the combined cross connection proposed by the LCT (made of
three single connections) is displayed in blue text.
The operator must now check that proposed connections are correct, i.e.
1. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the first SDH card must
be the one consistent with the group configured / expected from that line side
2. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the second SDH card
must be the one consistent with the group configured / expected from that line
side
If so, end the procedure by executing steps 9 and 10.
If no, do not accept the proposed connection and connect all the involved VC groups/TPs one
by one in three consecutive steps, and continue from point 12.
9. Click Connect. – If the shown connections is the cross connection entry changes to black
text if connected.
(depending on the filter settings)
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..-->
End of procedure
12. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 749
13. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the desired connection type (VC12-nv / VC3-
2v connection layer):
14. Select the first SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected from that card
15. Select on the LO matrix in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B Selection
field the VC group to be connected to the first SDH card, according to the incoming
circuit
16. Click Propose Connection and accept
17. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to connect the VC group in the LO matrix to the VC group in
the second SDH card, now selecting as Card A the second SDH card, TP A the VC4mux
that contains the VC group to be connected from that card; Card B the LO Matrix and TP
B the VC group in the LO to be connected to the second SDH card
18. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to reciprocally connect the VC groups in the LO matrix, now
selecting as Card A the LO matrix and TP A one of the VC groups created at point 1.b: as
card B again the LO Matrix and as TP B the other VC group created at point 1)
19. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic.. -->
End of procedure
750 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.8 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12-nv/VC3-2v Cross Connection
1. Before a cross connection at VC12nv/ VC3-2v level could be performed, the

following preliminary steps need to be carried out:
1. the VC12-nv /VC3-2v group must be created on the ETH card (see also 52.2
“How to configure ETH concatenations”)
2. on the LO matrix (SF10G / SF2G5) two VC12-nv/VC3-2v groups need to be

created (see also 52.1 “How to configure ETH concatenations”): a first one to be
connected to the SDH card and the second to be connected to the ETH card; in
this phase the operator must care that the two new groups are consistent (i.e.
they include the same members) with the VC group to be connected from the
SDH card and with the group configured on the ETH cards.
Example: if the VC3-2v coming from SDH line card uses VC3 #2 and #3, the
VC3-2v configured on the LO matrix that will be connected to this group must
include the same members: dually, if on the ETH card a VC3-2v using VC3 #1
and #2 has been set-up, the VC3-2v on the LO matrix that will be attached to this
group must include the same members.
In case of VC12-nv groups to be connected the same attention has to be paid.
2. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type:
5. Select the VC12-nv or VC3-2v connection layer.
6. Select the SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected to the ETH card.
7. Select the ETH card in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B Selection
field the VC group previously created at point 1.a.
8. Click Propose Connection: the combined cross connection proposed by the LCT
(made of three single connections) is displayed in blue text.
The operator must now check that proposed connections are correct, i.e.:
1. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the SDH card must be
the one consistent with the group configured / expected from the line side
2. 4. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the ETH card must
be the one consistent with the corresponding group previously configured (point
1.a) on the ETH card.
If so, end the procedure by executing steps 9 and 10.
If no, do not accept the proposed connection and connect all the involved VC groups/TPs one
by one in three consecutive steps, and continue from point 12
9. Click Connect. – If the shown connections is the cross connection entry changes to
black text if connected.
(depending on the filter settings)
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..--
> End of procedure
12. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 751
13. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the desired connection type (VC12-nv /
VC3-2v connection layer):
14. Select the SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4 that contains the VC group to be connected to the ETH card
15. Select on the LO matrix in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B
Selection field the VC group to be connected to the SDH card, according to the
incoming circuit
16. Click Propose Connection and accept
17. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to connect the VC group in the LO matrix to the VC group
in the ETH card, now selecting as Card A the ETH card, TP A the VC group created
at point 1a; Card B the LO Matrix and TP B the VC group in the LO to be connected
to the ETH card
18. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to reciprocally connect the VC groups in the LO matrix,
now selecting as Card A the LO matrix and TP A one of the VC groups created at
point 1.b: as card B again the LO Matrix and as TP B the other VC group created at
point 1.b.)
19. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic.. --
> End of procedure
752 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.9 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
1. Only in case of using a microshelf:

Make sure that a LNQ622 and a Switch Fabric card are additionally installed in subrack
1.
2. In the tool bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 LC Layer.
5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->
Close).

8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card
respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.

11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
12. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue
text.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 753
47.10 How to Add and Remove Path Protections
Adding a path protection:
1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection.

Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected
cross connection type.
5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end
point.
6. Click Add Protection.
Removing a path protection:
1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection.

Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.
5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.
754 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.11 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
4. Select the VC Level.
5. Line West: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.

Click the button "To TPA >>".
6. Line East: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.

Click the button "To TPB >>".
9. Select the Unidirectional Tail End CC Type.
10. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 5.

Click the button "To TPB >>".
11. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 6.

Click the button "To TPB' >>".
12. Tributary: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.

Click the button "To TPA >>".
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 755
47.12 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
4. Select the VC Level.
connection start point

connection end point

11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same
card A and TP a settings.
756 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.13 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross
connection in the list.
3. Click Add...
5. Select the same VC Level as the existing branches have.
6. Select the same card A and TP A as the existing branches have.

Click To TP A >>.
7. Select card B and TP B in the TP Selection field.

Click To TP B >>.
10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking
Graphic..
11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking
Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 757
47.14 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross
connection.
3. Click Delete.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.
758 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
47.15 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.
3. Click Disconnect.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be
disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 759
47.16 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC ->
Configuration...
3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to
configure.
4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.
5. In this window, make the relevant settings.
760 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (OH Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
48 How to... (OH Cross Connections)
48.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options
Setting OH cross connection filter options:
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the
selection fields to select the filtering features.
4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.
Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field
settings change to All.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 761
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (OH Cross Connections)
48.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list,
select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.
4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP A entry.
5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.
6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.
7. Click Connect.
762 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (OH Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
48.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross
connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in
detail in the OH CC Options area.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Confirm the acknowledgement window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 763
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (OH Cross Connections)
764 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
49 How to... (Protections)
49.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection
Creating a 1+1 MSP Protection:
2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
Click Apply.
3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.
4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and
click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.
7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply.
The 1+1 MSP protection is active.
Deleting a 1+1 MSP Protection:
2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.
3. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click
Apply. Confirm the warning message.
6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols ->
Protection...
7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click
Delete.
8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
9. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 765
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
49.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection (example IF2G5 card):
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select
the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create.
5. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection:

In the port list, right-click the port symbol with Provisioning Mode "2F Shared Ring..." ->
Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.
8. Click Apply.
Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:
2. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
6. Click Apply.
766 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
49.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one
of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode.
If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be
configured automatically..
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create.
5. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection:

In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." ->
Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, MSP Activation field, select "Activated".
8. Click Apply.
Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:
2. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
6. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 767
49.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings
2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2F-
SPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING ->
Configuration... -> Squelch...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign
the required Node Ids to each AU4.
5. Click Apply.
768 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
49.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
Creating an IF2M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number
symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.
2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.
3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
Deleting an IF2M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any
working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol
-> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection
scheme
Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection
scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this
card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will
not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A
deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:
a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall
be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into
the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is
configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the
respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it
started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection
slot will not cause any traffic hits.
If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection
group!
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 769
770 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
49.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection
Creating an IF345M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number
symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.
2. Configure the required IF345M card in the working card slot.
3. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
Deleting an IF345M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the
working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card
symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 771
49.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection
Creating an SF2G5 card protection:
2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
No further configurations are necessary.
Creating an SF10G card protection:
2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF10G protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
Creating an SF160G card protection:
2. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot

(105 in the double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)
3. Configure an SF160G (CP) protecting card in a suitable slot

(107 in the double-row subrack, 308 in the single-row subrack)
Deleting an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G card protection:
2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working
card.
772 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
49.8 How to Create an SNCP Protection
1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type:

Bidirectional Protected or
Unidirectional Head End or
Unidirectional Tail End.
4. Select the VC Level (e.g. VC4).
TP A:

TP B:

TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)

The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.
14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.
15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 773
49.9 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path
Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:
2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to
be prepared -> Subview...
3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...
4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...
5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab,
activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n.
To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.
6. Click the Apply button.
7. If LO concatenation is to be used:
In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create
the required concatenated containers.
Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):
1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified -> Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the TP A to be protected.

Click the button "To TPA >>"
6. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5).

Select the LO container from the VC4 that has been structured before.
Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):
2. In the Add Cross Connection window, CC Type, select Bidirectional Protected.
3. Select the VC Level VC4.
4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been
selected in the previous steps.
Click the button "To TPA >>"
774 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the
protecting path.
Click the button "To TPB >>"
8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 775
49.10 How to Set Up the Squelching Table
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1
tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection
or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Traffic Flow window, right-click the 2F-SPRING or

4F-SPRING symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, click Squelch...
6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.
The following illustrations give an example:
776 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 777
49.11 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link
1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC
subrack and the extension shelf is connected.
2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Module View, insert an LNQ622M card.

In the Card Equipment Config window, configure a port.
4. Right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...

Configure a microshelf with a suitable subrack ID according to the table in the ITMN..
5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.
6. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4
symbol -> Configuration...
8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.
10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.
11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection
with the number according to the actual configuration.
12. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4
symbol -> Configuration...
14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM protection card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols ->
Protection...
16. Select the entry in the list.

Click Create.
17. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...

Now the protection group is available.
778 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 779
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
50 How to... (GMPLS)
50.1 How to set up a GMPLS domain

IP Addresses Configuration:
• The “IP Addresses Configuration” window is accessible via the Module View,
Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration ->
TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...
• We have to set the addresses of Ethernet Interface (eth0) and Local Loopback Interface
(lo:0)
OSPF Configuration
• The OSPF Configuration window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by
using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic
Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
• OSPF Router ID = lo:0 interface address
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 781
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
• Enable OSPF setting the checkbox
• The “OSPF Interfaces Configuration” is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1
tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP
dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces…
• This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.
• A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is

the OSPF Configuration
• Check the “Administrative State”. It must be “up”.
Note: After the initial startup (with default MIB) in the non-GMPLS mode, OSPF is running but
with all interfaces disabled. If the operator would like to use OSPF he has to enable OPSF at
the respective interfaces. For disabling OSPF at all, the operator has to set the AdminStatus
of OSPF to down.
• Check the Neighbours Table.
• The OSPF Neighbours Information window is accessible via the Module View,
Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration ->
TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
782 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
RSVP Configuration
• The window to configure some parameters of RSVP is accessible via SCOH Card
symbol > Configuration > GMPLS > Configuration…
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 783
TP Reservation to GMPLS
• The TP Reservation window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context
menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Reserve TPs...
• Select “Reserved” for the ports (line and client) reserved for GMPLS.
Port Configuration
• The Port Configuration window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the
context menu of an interface card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or
Configuration -> Port...
• For Line Interface Cards Select I-NNI in Port Classification field
784 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
• For Client Interface Cards, select NON GMPLS in Port Classification field.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 785
50.2 How to create TE Links
• Open the Interface Configuration window. This window is accessible via SCOH Card
symbol > Configuration > GMPLS > Interfaces…
• Click the Add button. The Entry Add window will be opened.
• Fill in the following fields
o Local Index = Remote Index -> Network Interface Index
o Name -> Name of the link
o Remote Router ID -> For a point to point link, this specifies the router ID of the
remote peer.
• Click the Next button.
786 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
o Metric -> The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface.
o SRLG IDs -> This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. (The risk to be
broken)
• Click the Add and the Finish buttons
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 787
50.3 How to create Component Link
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the interface. Click the Interface
Management button.
o Administrative Status -> Up
o Remote Router ID -> The router ID of the remote peer.
o Remote Index -> Select NE, Subrack, Slot and Port.
o TE Link -> The name of TE link
• Click the Apply button
788 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
50.4 How to Modify TE Links

Enabling/Disabling TE Link
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link.
• In the Administrative Status field, select Up to enable and Down to disable the TE link.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 789
Modification of SRLG and Metric
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. The Administrative
Status field must be Down.
• Click the Interface Management button.
• In TE Link tab, in SRLG IDs section, you can Add or Delete the SRLG ID
• In the same tab, in Metric field, you can change the metric value.
790 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Modification of Remote Router ID
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. The Administrative
Status field must be Down.
• Click the Interface Management button.
• In General tab, you can change the Remote Router ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 791
50.5 How to Delete TE Links
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. Change the
Administrative Status from Up to Down. Click the Delete button.
792 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
50.6 How to Create Unprotected Call
• Open the Call List window. This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol >
Configuration > GMPLS > Call List…
• Click the Add button. The Call Entry Add window will be opened.
• Select the General tab.
• Fill in the requested fields. Chose “Unprotected” in Protection Class field.
• Select the Traffic tab.
• Fill in the requested fields.
• Select the Routing tab.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 793
• Fill in the requested fields.
• Click the Add and Apply buttons.
794 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
50.7 How to Delete Unprotected Call
• Open the Call List window.
• Change the Administrative Status from Up to Down. Click the Delete button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 795
50.8 How to Create Protected (1+1 PP) Call
• Open the Call Entry Add window.
• In General tab chose “1+1 PP” in Protection Class field.
796 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protected (1+1 PP) Call Switch
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button. The
Call Entry Modify window will be opened.
• Chose the switch command in External Switch Request field.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 797
50.9 How to Create Permanent Protected (1+1 PP) + DSR Call
• Open the Call Entry Add window.
• In General tab, chose “Permanent 1+1 +DSR” in Protection Class field.
798 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Permanent Protected (1+1 PP) + DSR Call Switch
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button. The
Call Entry Modify window will be opened.
• Chose the switch command in External Switch Request field.
How to Do Protected Call Reversion
• Reversion describes the process during which recovered traffic is switched back to the
original path.
• hiT7070 support reversion of the original working as well as the original protection path.
• The operator can manually switch back to the original path by the switch commands.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 799
50.10 How To Delete Protected Call
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Delete button.
800 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
50.11 How to Migrate From an Unprotected Call to a Protected One
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button.
• In General tab, in Protection Class field, modify from Unprotected to the desired
protection.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 801
50.12 How to Migrate From a Protected Call to an Unprotected One
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button.
• In General tab, in Protection Class field, modify from Protected to Unprotected.
Note: It is not possible the migration from a Protected call to a different protection.
802 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Concatenations) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
51 How to... (Concatenations)
51.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations
2. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.
3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
4. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.
5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and
TPs, as applicable.
6. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 803
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (Concatenations)
51.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations
2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.
4. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.
5. Click Apply.
804 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GFP Configurations) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
52 How to... (GFP Configurations)
52.1 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.->

Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the
Concatenation Group Templates.
Click Apply.
4. Close the Concatenation Config window.
5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....
6. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment or LP Bandwidth Configuration

area (as applicable), enter the bandwidth for each GFP Group.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message.
8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP
group.
9. Click Apply.
10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.
11. Upload a VCDB for the NE.
Note:
To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross
connection.
If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload
interruption of all channels served by the card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 805
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (GFP Configurations)
52.2 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol ->
Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value
for the concerned Ethernet port.
4. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.
Note:
Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum
must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH
capacity may cause packet loss!
806 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Data and Software Handling) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
53 How to... (Data and Software Handling)
53.1 How to Download VCDB Files
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...
2. Set NE State to Idle.
3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.
4. Click Download...
A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
5. Select the path and the file you want to download.
6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.
7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After
the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the
VCDB download is successfully completed.
8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close
to close the window.
Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to
verify which setting is missing).
After removing the error, repeat the download process.
9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the
NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE
symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...
10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE
will be initialized automatically.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 807
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Data and Software Handling)
53.2 How to Upload VCDB Files
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...
2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload...

A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.
4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.
5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the
upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB
upload is successfully completed..
Note:
During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.
808 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
54 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
54.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see SCOH,
CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an
operating SCOH.
The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC.
The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC.
To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again.
If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be
adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack!
Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot.
Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.
For detailed flow charts, see:
How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 809
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
54.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH

For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.
If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
Note:
battery.
810 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 811
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
Flow Chart Symbol Legend
812 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
54.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow
chart.
Note:
battery.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 813
814 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 815
54.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
816 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 817
818 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
54.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 819
54.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend
820 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Index Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
55 Index
1 APS Compatibility Information ............. 706
1 1 MSP Configuration..........................189 ASIC Data Information ......................... 428
1 N MSP Alarms ...................................116 Assigned VLAN IDs Information .......... 257
1 N MSP Configuration .........................191 AU4 PJE Performance......................... 442
1 N MSP Extension...............................195 AU4/VC4 Configuration........................ 154
1 N MSP Protected Traffic Flow ...........121 B
1 N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow .......122 Booster Cards Label Information ........... 50
2 C
2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration Card Configuration for ETH Cards......... 63

..........................................................210
Card Configuration for SDH Cards ........ 61
2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration
..........................................................208 Card Equipment Configuration .............. 51
2F SPRING Configuration ....................199 Card Inventory Summary....................... 41
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration...........202 Change Password to Default ............... 699
4 CLU Card Configuration......................... 53
4F SPRING Configuration ....................205 Communication Alarm Feature Table .. 109
4F SPRING Traffic Flow .......................139 Communication Alarms........................ 107
A Concatenation Configuration ............... 236
Abbreviations ............................................1 Concatenation Details.......................... 239
About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software......15 Concatenation Group Templates......... 241
Access Information ...............................697 Copy Card Data ................................... 431
Active APS Record ...............................705 Copy Data ............................................ 429
Actual Equipping Information..................40 Cross Connection Details .................... 177
Add 1 N MSP ........................................194 Cross Connection Graphic Details....... 180
Add Concatenation Group ....................240 Cross Connections Graphic ................. 178
Add Cross Connection..........................175 Cross Connections List ........................ 171
Add Extension Link Protection..............225 D
Add VLAN ID Assignment ....................258 Date / Time Configuration ...................... 17
Add Working Ports................................196 DB Download Dialog............................ 434
Adding a Reachable DCC Address ......313 DB Management Configuration ........... 432
Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address 321 DB Upload Dialog ................................ 435
Alarm List..............................................101
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 821
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Index
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC How to Add and Remove Path Protections
Connections .....................................316 ......................................................... 754
Delta Software Download .....................704 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

......................................................... 805
E
How to Change a Defective MMC on a
E12 Configuration .................................164 Working SCOH ................................ 816
E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ............................95 How to Change a Defective SCOH...... 810

E3 Configuration ...................................166 How to Change a Defective SCOH
inclusive a Defective MMC .............. 813
E3/VC3 Alarms .....................................114
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance ......................................................... 729
..........................................................713
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
EOW Configurations ...............................30 ......................................................... 760
Equipment Alarms ................................105 How to Configure ETH Cards and
Debugging ....................................... 733
ESM-CORE Card Configuration .............38
How to Configure ETH Concatenations804
ETH Configuration ................................161
How to Configure NSAP Settings ........ 727
ETH Traffic Flow .....................................94
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports 730
Ethernet Packet Performance ..............439
How to Configure SDH Concatenations
Extension Link Protection Configuration ......................................................... 803
..........................................................224
How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F
Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow .223 or 4F Rings ...................................... 769
Extension Shelf Configuration ................37 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
......................................................... 728
F
How to Configure the Timing ............... 735
Fan Unit Fault Clearance......................725
How to Configure the Visible Alarm
Flow Chart Symbol Legend ..................820
Signaling .......................................... 739
G
How to Configure TIF Ports ................. 741
GFP Assignment...........................254; 271
How to Copy Alarm Performance and
GFP Frames Performance ...................483 Traffic Configurations from Object to
Object .............................................. 731
GFP Group Subview.............................270
How to Copy Card Configurations from
GFP Group Traffic Flow........................269 Object to Object............................... 732
GMPLS tunnel List PPRO Hop Table...563 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line
Protection......................................... 765
H
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Protection......................................... 767
Cross Connection.............................757
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING
How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Protection......................................... 768
Existing LO Path...............................775
How to Create / Delete an 1+1 MSP Line
Protections....................................... 765
822 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card How to Set Up the Squelching Table... 777
Protection .........................................770
How to Suppress Alarms ..................... 740
How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card
Protection .........................................772 How to Upload VCDB Files.................. 808
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 SF10G I

or SF160G Card Protection..............773
IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration ........ 59
How to Create a Broadcast Cross
Connection .......................................756 IF2M Card Label Information ................. 48
How to Create a Cross Connection ......744 IFO155M Card Label Information .......... 43
How to Create a Drop / Continue IFO155ME Card Label Information........ 45

Connection .......................................755
IFQGBEB Port configuration................ 149
How to Create an OH Cross Connection
..........................................................762 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration............. 62
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information ...... 49

Cross Connection.............................748
IFSO* Cards Configuration .................... 69
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross
IP Addresses Configuration ................. 333
Connection .......................................753
IP Addresses Entry Modify .................. 336
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross
Connection .......................................745 IP Static Routing Configuration............ 337
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross IP Static Routing Entry Add ................. 339
Connection .......................................746
IP Static Routing Entry Modify ............. 340
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross
Connection .......................................747 ISTM 4 Configuration ........................... 227
How to Create an SNCP Protection .....774 L
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast LCAS State Configuration.................... 277
Connection .......................................758
LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .............. 281
How to Disconnect a Cross Connection
..........................................................759 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection 285
How to Disconnect an OH Cross LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ................ 280

Connection .......................................763
LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection ... 284
How to Download VCDB Files..............807
LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration........ 289
How to Replace an MMC and/or the
SCOH ...............................................809 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration.......... 286
How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Log Records Attribute .......................... 437
Filter Options ....................................743
LSP List................................................ 565
How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection
Filter Options ....................................761 M
How to Set Sync Priorities ....................737 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information
......................................................... 301
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-
Channel ............................................806 MCF CLNS Performance..................... 303
How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link MCF DCC Configuration ...................... 307
..........................................................779
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 823
MCF DCC Linkage Configuration .........309 NewTopic 2 .......................................... 100
MCF DCC Linkage Performance..........311 NMS NE Password .............................. 698
MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration ...317 O
MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ....319 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance 709
MCF IP over OSI Configuration............325 Option Settings ...................................... 28
MCF OSI over IP Adding a Reachable OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration. 354
Address ............................................330
OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add ...... 356
MCF OSI over IP Modifying a Reachable
Address ............................................332 OSPF Area Metric Configuration ......... 352
MCF OSI over IP Configuration............326 OSPF Area Metric Entry Add............... 353
MCF OSI over IP Performance.............328 OSPF Areas Configuration .................. 346
MCF Stack Parameters Configuration..296 OSPF Areas Entry Add ........................ 351
MCF Transport Connection Information OSPF Areas Entry Modify.................... 348

..........................................................298
OSPF Configuration............................. 341
MCF Transport Connection Performance
..........................................................300 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ..... 389
Message Communication Functions ....293 OSPF External LSDB Information ....... 387
Mixed Mode GFP Assignment..............254 OSPF Interface Entry Modify ............... 360
Modify Cross Connection .....................181 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration... 367
Modify LCAS Concatenation Group .....279 OSPF Interfaces Configuration............ 358
Modify Template ...................................242 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add ................. 364
Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ..315 OSPF LSDB Entry Details ................... 385
Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address OSPF LSDB Information...................... 383

..........................................................323
OSPF Neighbours Entry Details .......... 377
Module View Double-row Subrack ........20
OSPF Neighbours Information............. 375
Module View Single-row Subrack..........24
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration. 368
MSTTP Far End Performance ..............451
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add ...... 373
MSTTP Near End Performance............447
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Modify .. 371
N
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details 381
NE and Subrack Fault Clearance .........707
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information . 379
NE Logs Information .............................436
Overall Performace .............................. 566
NEAP Configuration..............................104
Overhead Cross Connections.............. 182
Neighbour Ports......................................31
P
Network Element Configuration..............18
PDH Cards Label Information................ 44
NewTopic 1...........................................733
Performance ........................................ 394
824 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Plain Cross Connections List................173 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING

......................................................... 212
Port Configuration.................................143
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING
Port Provisioning Configuration ..............70 Extra ................................................ 213
Possible Equipping Information ..............39 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING

......................................................... 214
Protection Management .......................185
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-
R SPRING ........................................... 211
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB ...................819 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic
Flow ................................................. 133
RSTTP Near End Performance ............455
STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP
RSVP Performance ..............................568 Traffic Flow ...................................... 135
S STM-16 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.... 135
SCOH NE and Subrack Fault Clearance STM-16 Traffic Flow............................... 91
..........................................................721
STM-4 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow................ 130
SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance.721
STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow............... 126
SCOH Card Configuration ......................52
STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection .................... 88
SCOH Card Label Information................47
STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow...... 124
Script Configuration ................................32
STM-4 Traffic Flow................................. 89
SDH GFP Assignment ..........................274
STM-64 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow.............. 132
SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label
Information .........................................43 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic
Flow ................................................. 128
SF160G Card Configuration ...................55
STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow137
SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration ....56
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection .................. 92
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-
row Subrack .......................................58 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING
......................................................... 216
Software Download...............................703
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING
Software Management..........................701 Extra ................................................ 217
STM-1 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................129 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING
......................................................... 218
STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ...............125
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-
STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.......123
SPRING ........................................... 215
STM-1 Traffic Flow .................................87
STM-64 Gauge Performance............... 444
STM-16 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ..............131
STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic
STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ................................................. 136
Flow ..................................................127
STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP
STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow134 Traffic Flow ...................................... 138
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ...................90 STM-64 Traffic Flow............................... 93
STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ........... 187
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 825
STM-N Configuration ............................150 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.............. 158
Subrack Data ........................................427 VC4 Configuration.................................. 96
SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ................14 VC4 Multiplex Structure ....................... 169
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance.....718 VC4 Selection ........................................ 99
Switching Entry Details .........................392 VC4 Selection with ETH Cards............ 141
Synchronous Equipment Clock VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow ......... 100
Configuration ......................................77
VCCTP Far End Performance ............. 463
T
VCCTP Near End Performance........... 459
T0 Configuration .....................................80
VCTTP Far End Performance.............. 471
T1 Configuration .....................................81
VCTTP Near End Performance ........... 467
T3 / T4 Config .........................................83
Virtual 16x VC4 Selection .................... 233
TCA List ................................................119
Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .............. 259
TCP Connections Entry Details ............425
Virtual 2x VC3 Selection ...................... 230
TCP Connections Information ..............423
TIF Configuration ..................................118
Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection ............ 234
TIF Fault Clearance ..............................724
TP_Reservation ......................................75
Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration ............ 266
Tunnel List C Hop table ........................561
Virtual VC12 Configuration .................. 260
U
Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration ............ 263
Using this Help System...........................13
VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment.......... 251
V
VLAN C Traffic Flow .................... 248; 251
VC12 Far End Performance .................479
VLAN Functionality .............................. 245
VC12 Near End Performance...............475
VLAN Selection.................................... 250
VC12-2v Configuration .........................235
W
VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection...........229
Working STM-1 Selection .................... 197
VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ..............156
Working VC4 Selection ........................ 198
826 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619

SURPASS Hit 7070 3.2 Documentation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SURPASS Hit 7070 3.2 Documentation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation

SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

1.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................... 1

13.4 IFQGBEB Port configuration .......................................................... 149

21.3 Add Extension Link Protection........................................................ 225

28 MCF CLNS 301

34 OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) 395

38.10 Protecting Hop List ..................................................................... 525

40.5 IFS10GBE Vlan Traffic Flow........................................................... 679

47.7 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12-nv/VC3-2v Cross Connection 749

54.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ................ 816

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AFI Authority and Format Identifier

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

AK TPDU Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photo Diode

APS Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching

ASBR Autonomous System Border Router

ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)

ASW Application SoftWare

AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4

AUI Attachment Unit Interface

AUX Auxiliary channel

BASW BAsic SoftWare

BBE Background Block Error

BDM Background Debug Mode interface

BER Bit Error Ratio

CC Cross Connect / Cross Connection

CLNS ConnectionLess Network layer Service

CLU Central Clock Unit

CPL Current Problem List

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRS Card Release State

CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1

CSO Card Switch Off

CTP Connection Termination Point

CUG Closed User Group

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus

DCCM DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)

DCCR DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DNU Do Not Use

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DSP Domain Specific Part

E4 Electrical interface signal

EBC Error Block Count

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

ECCM ECC for Multiplex section

ECCR ECC for Regeneration section

EDI Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EPS Equipment Protection Switch

ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)

ESD ElectroStatic Discharge

ESM-Core Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf